Operating instructions | Epson 510DN Printer User Manual

HD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HM790U
GY-HM790CHU
GY-HM790E
GY-HM790CHE
INSTRUCTIONS
* The illustration shows the GY-HM790E with the supplied viewfinder, microphone and lens attached.
* GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790CHE does not come with a lens.
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the body.
Retain this information for future reference.
Model No.
GY-HM790U/GY-HM790CHU
Serial No.
Please read the following before getting started:
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product.
Before operating this unit, please read the instructions
carefully to ensure the best possible performance.
In this manual, each model number is described without the last letter
(U/E) which means the shipping destination. (U: for USA and Canada,
E: for Europe)
Only “U”models (GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U) have been evaluated by
UL.
LST1108-001A
Introduction
FOR USA
These are general IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS and certain items may not apply to all appliances.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Read all of these instructions.
Save these instructions for later use.
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
Unplug this appliance system from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol
cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
5. Do not use attachments not recommended by the appliance manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
6. Do not use this appliance near water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet
basement, or near a swimming pool, etc.
PORTABLE CART WARNING
Do
not place this appliance on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The appliance may fall,
7.
(symbol provided by RETAC)
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance.
Use only with a cart or stand recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the appliance.
Wall or shelf mounting should follow the manufacturer's instructions, and should use a
mounting kit approved by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be
moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart
S3125A
combination to overturn.
8. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, and to insure reliable operation of
the appliance and to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should
never be blocked by placing the appliance on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface.
This appliance should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register.
This appliance should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase unless proper ventilation is provided.
9. This appliance should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure
of the type of power supplied to your home, consult your dealer or local power company. For appliance designed to
operate from battery power, refer to the operating instructions.
10. For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods
of time, unplug it form the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the
product due to lightning and power-line surges.
11. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this appliance where the cord will be abused by persons
walking on it.
12. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the appliance.
13. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in fire or electric shock.
14. Never push objects of any kind into this appliance through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or
short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the appliance.
15. Do not attempt to service this appliance yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage
or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
16. Unplug this appliance from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
a. When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b. If liquid has been spilled into the appliance.
c. If the appliance has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the appliance does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that
are covered by the operating instructions as improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will
often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the appliance to normal operation.
e. If the appliance has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f. When the appliance exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service.
17. When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the
manufacturer that have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire,
electric shock, or other hazards.
18. Upon completion of any service or repairs to this appliance, ask the service technician to perform routine safety checks
to determine that the appliance is in safe operating condition.
II
Safety Precautions
POUR CANADA
ATTENTION
RISQUE D’ELECTROCUTION NE
PAS OUVRIR
FOR USA AND CANADA
CAUTION
ATT ENTION: POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE D’ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR LE BOITER.
AUCUNE PIECE INTERIEURE N’EST A REGLER
PAR L’UTILISATEUR.
SE REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE EN CAS DE
PROBLEME.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Le symbole de l’éclair à l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’une “tension dangereuse” non isolée
dans le boîtier du produit. Cette tension est
suffisante pour provoquer l’électrocution de
personnes.
Le point d’exclamation àl’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’opérations d’entretien importantes au
sujet desquelles des renseignements se trouvent
dans le manuel d’instructions.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER
(OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
INFORMATION:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.
CAUTION:
CHANGES OR MODIFICAT IONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC
COULD VOID USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE
EQUIPMENT.
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC
RULES.
OPERAT ION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO
CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING
INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED
OPERAT ION.
Ces symboles ne sont utilisésqu’aux Etats-Unis.
INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la Class A est conforme à la
norme NMB-003 du Canada.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
This unit should be used with 12V DC only.
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT use any
other power source.
AVERTISSEMENT:
POUR EVITER LES RISQUES
D’INCENDIE OU D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS
EXPOSER L’APPAREIL A L’HUMIDITE OU A LA
PLUIE.
ATTENTION:
Ce magnétoscope ne doit être utilisé que sur du courant
direct en 12V.
Afin d’eviter tout resque d’incendie ou d’electrocution, ne
pas utillser d’autres sources d’alimentation électrique.
NOTE:
The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the unit.
REMARQUE:
La plaque signalétique (plaque du numéro desérie) est située sur
le cadre inférieur de l’unité.
CAUTION:
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user
serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service
personnel.
Due to design modifications, data given in this instruction book
are subject to possible change without prior notice.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed
close to the apparatus.
III
Introduction
Safety Precautions
(continued)
Information for Users on Disposal of Old Equipment
[European Union]
FOR EUROPE
This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and
protection requirements of the corresponding European
Directives. This equipment is designed for professional video
appliances and can be used in the following environments:
● Controlled EMC environment (for example, purpose-built
broad-casting or recording studio), and rural outdoors
environments.
In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for
electromagnetic compatibility we recommend to use cables
not exceeding the following lengths:
Port
[DC INPUT]
[Y/VIDEO], [PB], [PR]
Cable
Length
Exclusive Cable
5m
Coaxial Cable
10 m
[AUDIO INPUT 1/2]
Shielded Cable
3m
[AUDIO OUTPUT]
Shielded Cable
10 m
[PHONES]
Exclusive Cable
3m
[IEEE1394]
Exclusive Cable
3m
[HD/SD-SDI]
[REMOTE]
[LENS]
[VF]
Coaxial Cable
10 m
Exclusive Cable
5m
Unshielded Cable
0.1 m
Special Cable
0.3 m
[USB]
Shielded Cable
2m
[GENLOCK INPUT]
Shielded Cable
10 m
[TC IN]
Shielded Cable
10 m
[TC OUT]
Shielded Cable
10 m
[STUDIO]
Exclusive Cable
0.3 m
Caution:
Where there are strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism, for
example near a radio or TV transmitter, transformer, motor, etc.,
the picture and the sound may be disturbed. In such case, please
keep the apparatus away from the sources of the disturbance.
Dear Customer,
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European directives and
standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety.
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited is:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Germany
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien und
Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit und
elektrischer Sicherheit überein.
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,
Limited ist:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Deutschland
IV
Attention:
This symbol is only valid in the European
Union.
This symbol indicates that the electrical and electronic
equipment should not be disposed as general household
waste at its end-of-life. Instead, the product should be handed
over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of
electrical and electronic equipment for proper treatment,
recovery and recycling in accordance with your national
legislation.
By disposing of this product correctly, you will help to conserve
natural resources and will help prevent potential negative
effects on the environment and human health which could
otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this
product. For more information about collection point and
recycling of this product, please contact your local municipal
office, your household waste disposal service or the shop
where you purchased the product. Penalties may be applicable
for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
(Business users)
If you wish to dispose of this product, please visit our web
page http://www.jvc.eu to obtain information about the takeback of the product.
[Other Countries outside the European Union]
If you wish to dispose of this product, please do so in
accordance with applicable national legislation or other rules
in your country for the treatment of old electrical and
electronic equipment.
V
Introduction
Contents
Introduction
Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Precautions for Proper Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Names of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Side Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Side Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SD Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Zoom Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Basic System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . 18
Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Enlarged Status Display on LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 19
Auto White Display (Camera Mode Only,
Excluding AUX Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Menu Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Zebra Pattern Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Preparations
Attaching Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Attaching the Zoom Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Attaching the Microphone (Supplied) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Attaching the Viewfinder (Supplied) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Using AC Power (DC IN Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Using a Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Turning On/Off the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Setting the Clock (Initial Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Adjusting the Monitor Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Adjusting Back Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Tally Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SDHC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SDHC Cards to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Formatting (Initializing) SDHC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Restoring the SDHC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Clips Recorded to SDHC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Recording Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2
Shooting
Basic Shooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Focus Assist Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format . . .38
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos . . . . . . . . . . .39
Adjusting the Iris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Setting Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Setting the Electronic Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Adjusting the White Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Adjusting the White Shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Setting the ND Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Adjusting Audio Input Settings and Recording Level . . . . .46
Setting Audio Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Adjusting Audio Recording Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Audio Monitor During Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Time Code and User’s Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Time Code Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Using the Internal Time Code Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Presetting the Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Presetting the User’s Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Setting Time Code Without Opening the Menu . . . . . .51
Setting User’s Bit Without Opening the Menu . . . . . . .52
Recording Time Code in Continuation of
the Recorded Time Code on SDHC card . . . . . . . . .52
Synchronizing Time Code with External Time Code
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Setting Zebra Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Setting Spot Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review) . . . .56
Assigning Functions to User Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Protecting Important Scenes (OK Mark Function) . . . . . . .58
Special Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Pre Rec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Clip Continuous Rec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Variable Frame Rec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Playback
Playing Back Recorded Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Thumbnail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Playing Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Thumbnail Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Deleting Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Appending and Deleting OK Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Basic Operations in Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Display and Description of the Menu Screen . . . . . . . . 70
Text Input with Software Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Main Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Record Set Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Record Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Rec Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Clip Set Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Audio Set Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Camera Function Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Switch Set Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
FULL AUTO Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Camera Process Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Detail/Adjust... Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
White Balance Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Shading Mode/Adjust Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Color Matrix/Adjust Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
TC/UB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
LCD/VF Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Shooting Assist Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Marker Setting Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Status Display Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
A/V Out Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Others Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Genlock Adjust Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Media Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setup File Manage Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items
(Favorites Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Editing Favorites Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Status Screen
Status Screen in Camera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Status Screen in SD Card Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Status Screen in IEEE1394 Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Enlarged Status Display on LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Camera Features
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode Only,
Excluding AUX Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Smoothening the Skin Color (Skin Detail Function) . . . . 114
Color Bar Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Color Matrix Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Reproduction of Dark Areas (Black Stretch/Compress
Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Configuring Setup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Saving Setup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Loading a Setup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Resetting Setup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Connecting External Devices
Connecting an External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
IEEE1394 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Backup Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Input of Composite Video Signals from External Device
(GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Input of External Synchronizing Signal (Genlock) . . . . . .126
Displaying Return Video from External Device . . . . . . . .128
Studio System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Managing/Editing Clips on a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Remote Control Unit Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
List of Remote Control Unit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Others
Error Displays and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Tally Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Alarm Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
How to use this manual
䡵 Symbols used
Note
: Describes precautions concerning the
operation of this product.
Memo
: Describes reference information, such as
functions and usage restrictions of this
product.
A
: Indicates the reference page numbers and
reference items.
䡵 Content of this manual
● All rights reserved by JVC. Unauthorized duplication or
reprinting of this manual, in whole or in part, is strictly
prohibited.
● All other product names used in this manual are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies. Marks such as ™, 姞, 姝 have been omitted in
this manual.
● Illustrated designs, specifications and other contents of
this manual are subject to change for improvement
without prior notice.
3
Introduction
Main Features
Adoption of MPEG-2 Long GOP for Easy
Editing
Shortens editing and output time by adopting MPEG-2
codec, which puts less stress on the editing computer.
This camera recorder enables recording of HD/SD format
images to an SDHC card, and also playback of these
images.
[GENLOCK INPUT], [TC IN], [TC OUT]
Terminals and Return Video Function
Equipped with a function that enables use of multiple
cameras as well as use as a studio camera.
SD (Standard Definition) Recording
Supports DV compression of SD images and recording in the
QuickTime or AVI file format.
The use of a wide array of non-linear editing software is also
supported, which helps to ease production of SD videos,
such as DVDs.
High Resolution via Triplex Offset
2.5k x 1.4k pixels are generated with the Triplex Offset, and a
high resolution of more than 900 horizontal lines and 1000
diagonal lines is achieved using the proprietary front
processing.
Spot Meter Function
The brightest and darkest positions on the screen are
automatically detected and displayed together with the
dynamic range. As this is a pre-gamma value, it allows you to
understand the lighting ratio and prevents overexposure or
underexposure in shooting scenes where lighting is
controlled.
High Resolution Viewfinder
Recording in QuickTime File Format
Recording can be made in QuickTime file format of Final Cut
Pro, a video editing software from Apple Inc.
You can edit the recorded clips directly with Final Cut Pro.
With a high resolution of 852 x 480 in 0.425 inches, the
viewfinder is now more robust and enables more accurate
focusing.
High Resolution LCD Monitor
Recording in MP4 File Format
Equipped with a 4.3 inch 800x480 large LCD monitor, both
shooting precision and viewing performance are improved.
This camera supports recording in the MP4 file format for
Windows NLE systems, which can be utilized in a wide range
of non-linear editing environments.
Intuitive User Interface
Recording on SDHC Memory Card (Class
6/10)
The absence of mechanisms with the use of SDHC (Class
6/10) as recording media brings about increased operation
reliability. In addition, the improved compatibility with
computers enables high-speed data transfer to NLE as well
as reduction of operating costs.
The sophisticated user interface allows more intuitive
operations. Thumbnail display is also available for you to
easily select a recorded clip for playback.
Compact Shoulder Style
By inheriting the compact shoulder style from the GY-HD100
series which is widely accepted in the industry, more stable
shooting can be done on this camera recorder while its weight
remains similar to that of a handheld camera recorder.
35 Mbps High Image Quality Mode
This camera recorder is equipped with a 35 Mbps high quality
mode, in addition to the HDV mode bit rate (19/25 Mbps).
Lens Interchangeability
Existing lenses can be used, thus saving on costs. You can
also select the most appropriate lens according to your
shooting requirements.
Dual Media Slots
Continuous recording is possible by loading two recording
media, thereby allowing a long recording time.
Professional Batteries
Wide Variety of Recording Formats
Batteries such as Anton Bauer and IDX batteries that are
used in the broadcast industry can be used with this camera
recorder.
This camera recorder supports various HD formats (1080i,
1080p, 720p) as well as SD (DV) formats (480i : U model,
576i : E model), enabling it to be used under various
environments. It also supports 1440x1080 and 1920x1080
full resolution in the 1080 format.
4
Support for Wide Variety of Output
Supports industrial output such as HD-SDI output and
IEEE1394 output.
Application Software Provided
Precautions for Proper Use
The [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] application software is
provided for you to copy recorded clips to Windows or
Macintosh computers and for checking the video images.
(For MP4 file format)
The CD-ROM provided with this camera recorder
comes with [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] and other
application software as well as their user guides.
* For details, refer to the user guides for each application
software.
Storage and Usage Locations
䡵 Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use this unit within the allowable temperature range of
0 f to 40 f and a relative humidity of 30 % to 80 %. Using this
unit at a temperature or humidity outside the allowable ranges could
result not only in malfunction but also serious impact on the CCD
elements as small white spots may be generated. Please exercise
care during use.
䡵 Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the colors may be
incorrect if this unit is used near a radio or television transmitting
antenna, in places where strong magnetic fields are generated by
transformers, motors, etc., or near devices emitting radio waves,
such as transceivers or cellular phones.
䡵 Use of wireless microphone near this unit
When a wireless microphone or wireless microphone tuner is used
near this unit during recording, the tuner could pick up noise.
䡵 Avoid using or placing this unit in the following places.
● Places subject to extreme heat or cold
● Places with excessive dirt or dust
● Places with high humidity or moisture
● Places subject to smoke or vapor such as near a
cooking stove
● Places subject to strong vibrations or unstable surfaces
● In a parked car under direct sunlight or near a heater for
long hours.
䡵 Do not place this unit at places that are subject to
radiation or X-rays, or where corrosive gases occur.
䡵 Protect this unit from being splashed with water.
(Especially when shooting in the rain)
䡵 Protect this unit from getting wet when shooting on a
beach. In addition, salt and sand may adhere to the body.
Be sure to clean the unit after use.
䡵 Protect this unit against penetration of dust when using it
in a place subject to sandy dust.
Transportation
Do not drop or hit this unit against a hard object when
transporting.
Power Saving
䡵 When this unit is not in use, be sure to set the [POWER] switch
to AOFFB in order to reduce power consumption.
5
Introduction
Precautions for Proper Use
(continued)
Maintenance
䡵 Turn off the power before performing any maintenance.
䡵 Wipe the external cabinet of the unit with a soft cloth. Do not
wipe the body with benzene or thinner. Doing so may cause the
surface to melt or turn cloudy. When it is extremely dirty, soak the
cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe the body with it, and
then use a clean cloth to remove the detergent.
Batteries
䡵 The following batteries can be used on this unit.
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U : Dionic90 (Anton Bauer)
GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E : Endura-HL9 (IDX)
* Models with an E suffix are for the European market and
the UL Listing mark is not applicable.
䡵 Make use of the recommended batteries. Heavy batteries
may fall off if not used correctly.
Regular Inspection (Maintenance)
Under normal environment, dust will accumulate on the
camera recorder when it is used over a long period. Dust
may enter the camera recorder especially if it is used
outdoors. This may affect the image and sound quality of the
camera recorder. Check and replace the fan after every 9000
hours (suggested guideline).
You can check the usage time of the fan in the [Others]
menu B [System Information] B [Fan Hour]. (A Page 95)
If the fan is used for more than 9000 hours without
replacement, AFAN MAINTENANCE REQUIREDB will be
displayed every time you turn on the power.
SDHC Cards
Use an SDHC card (4 GB to 32 GB) with Class 6 or higher
performance.
Using cards other than those from Panasonic, TOSHIBA or
SanDisk may result in recording failure or data loss.
6
Others
䡵 Do not insert objects other than the memory card into the
card slot.
䡵 Do not block the vent on the unit.
Blocking of the vent causes internal heating and may lead to
burns and fires.
䡵 Do not turn off the [POWER] switch or remove the power
cable during recording or playback.
䡵 The camera recorder may not show stable pictures for a
few seconds immediately after the power is turned on, but
this is not a malfunction.
䡵 When the video signal output terminals are not in use, put
on the covers to prevent damage to the terminals.
䡵 Do not drop this unit or subject it to strong impact or
vibration as it is a precision equipment.
䡵 Optical performance of lens
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color divergence
phenomena (magnification chromatic aberration) may occur
at the periphery of the image. This is not a camera
malfunction.
LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
䡵 The LCD monitor and viewfinder screens are
manufactured using high-precision technology. Black spots
may appear on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens, or
red, blue, and/or white spots may not disappear. However,
this is not a malfunction and these spots are not recorded on
the SDHC card.
䡵 If you use this unit continuously for a long period of time,
the characters displayed in the viewfinder may temporarily
remain on the screen. This is not recorded on the SDHC
card. They will not appear after you turn the power off and
then on again.
䡵 If you use this unit in a cold place, the images may appear
to lag on the screen, but this is not a malfunction. Retained
images are not recorded on the SDHC card.
䡵 Do not press against the surface with force or subject it to
strong impact. Doing so may damage or break the screens.
䡵 Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching
between the live video and playback images.
Due to the characteristic of the viewfinder display device,
colors may appear on the images when you blink your eyes.
This is not a malfunction. It does not affect the recorded
images, SDI output, or component output.
Handling of SDHC Cards
Characteristic CCD Phenomena
䡵 The access lamp lights up in red when data on the SDHC
card is being accessed. Do not remove the SDHC card
during data access (such as recording, playback, or
formatting). Do not turn off the power or remove the battery
and AC adapter during access either.
䡵 Smear and blooming
Due to the physical structure of CCDs, vertical streaking
(called “smear”) may occur when shooting an extremely
bright light source or expansion of light (called “blooming”)
may appear around it. Although the CCD employed in this
unit produces very little smear or blooming, these
phenomena may still occur when shooting a bright light
source.
䡵 Do not use or store the SDHC card in a place that is
subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
䡵 Do not place the SDHC card near locations that are
exposed to strong magnetic fields or radio waves.
Smear
Vertical pale streaking appearing at
high luminous object
䡵 Inserting the SDHC card incorrectly may result in damage
of this unit or the SDHC card.
High luminous object (such as light
bulbs, sun)
䡵 We are not liable for any accidental loss of data stored on
the SDHC card. Please back up any important data.
䡵 Make use of the SDHC card within the prescribed
conditions of use.
䡵 Do not use it at the following locations.
Places that are subject to direct sunlight, high humidity or
corrosion, places near thermal equipment, sandy or dusty
places, or in a car under the sun with the doors and windows
closed.
䡵 Do not bend or drop the SDHC card, or subject it to strong
impact or vibration.
䡵 When formatting or erasing data using the camera
recorder, only the file administration information is changed.
The data is not completely erased from the SDHC card. If
you want to completely erase all of the data, we recommend
either using commercially available software that is specially
designed for that purpose, or by physically destroying the
SDHC card with a hammer, etc.
䡵 Do not dismantle or modify the SDHC card.
䡵 Do not touch the terminals with your hands or with a metal
object.
䡵 Do not allow dust, dirt, water, or foreign objects to adhere
to the terminals.
Monitor Screen
Blooming
Blurring in highlight
䡵 Moire or aliasing
Stripes, lines or other fine patterns may appear jagged when
they are shot.
䡵 White dots
High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to produce
white dots in the image. This is especially prominent when
boosting the sensitivity.
This is a characteristic of the charged-coupled device (CCD).
As far as possible, use this unit under conditions where the
temperature of this unit does not increase.
Copyright
Any recordings made on this camera recorder that are
played back for profit or public preview may infringe on the
rights of the owner of the recordings.
Do not use the recordings for purpose other than personal
enjoyment without prior consent from the owner.
䡵 Do not remove the labels or stick other labels or stickers
on the SDHC cards.
䡵 Do not use pencils or ballpoint pens to write on the SDHC
cards. Always use oil-based pens.
䡵 If you format (initialize) the SDHC card, all data recorded
on the card, including video data and setup files, will be
deleted.
䡵 You are recommended to use cards that are formatted
(initialized) on this camera recorder.
● The SDHC card may be damaged if the camera recorder is
not operated correctly. Formatting (Initializing) the SDHC
card may allow it to operate correctly.
● SDHC cards that have been formatted (initialized) on other
cameras, computers or peripheral equipment may not
operate correctly. In this case, format (initialize) the SDHC
card on this camera recorder.
7
Introduction
Operation Mode
This camera recorder has three operation modes - Camera mode, Media mode, and USB mode.
The operation mode indicator on the left side of the camera recorder lights up according to the mode. The AUX mode is only
available on GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U.
Media Mode
Camera Mode
[CAM/MEDIA] Selection Button
IEEE1394
Mode
Camera Mode
[CAM/MEDIA] Selection Button
[GENLOCK/AUX]
Selection Switch
[CAM/MEDIA]
Selection
Button
SD Card Mode
Playback Button
Thumbnail Display
AUX Mode
(U model only)
Stop Button
Playback
(Playback/Pause/Fast Forward/
Rewind/Clip Jump)
USB Connection (When the confirmation to change to USB mode
appears and [Change] is selected)
Connection disabled on PC
USB Mode
(USB Mass Storage Class)
[CAM/MEDIA] Button
Operation Mode Indicator
Stop Button
Playback Button
8
Operation Mode
Camera
Mode
Camera
Mode
Operation
Mode
Description
Indicator
Blue
This is the camera shooting mode. The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode when
the power is turned on.
Memo :
● Images recorded on the SDHC card cannot be played back in this mode. However, you
can check (play back) the most recently recorded image using the Clip Review function.
(A Page 56)
Purple
Media
Mode
AUX Mode
(U model)
SD Card
Mode
IEEE1394
Mode
USB Mode
Blue
Green
Orange
Orange
When [Rec Mode] is set to AVariable FrameB, the operation mode indicator lights up in
purple during Variable Frame REC in Camera mode. (A Page 60)
This is a mode for input and recording of composite video signals from an external device.
This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded on the SDHC card.
Press the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button to enter SD Card mode when you are not
shooting in Camera mode. Once the camera recorder is in SD Card mode, thumbnails of
the selected media slot are displayed.
This is the input mode for video images from the IEEE1394-connected equipment.
The camera recorder enters IEEE1394 mode when you press the [CAM/MEDIA] selection
button while the power of the equipment connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal is turned on
during thumbnail display in Media mode (SD Card mode). (Only for HD video systems)
When an SD video system is in use, availability of the [IEEE1394] terminal connection
cannot be detected in Media mode (SD Card mode). Allow the camera recorder to detect
the [IEEE1394] terminal connection in advance by turning on the power of the connected
equipment in Camera mode.
Once the camera recorder is in IEEE1394 mode, the playback images of the connected
equipment are displayed.
However, if the IEEE1394 connection is not recognized (such as when the power of the
IEEE1394-connected equipment is not turned on), the camera recorder will switch to
Camera mode instead.
Press the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button during IEEE1394 mode to switch to Camera
mode.
If the power of the equipment connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal is OFF or if connection
is canceled in IEEE1394 mode, the camera recorder will not automatically switch to other
modes. To quit IEEE1394 mode, you must operate the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button.
Note :
● This mode is used for viewing images input to the [IEEE1394] terminal from an external
device, and not intended for recording input images on the camera recorder.
This mode allows you to connect to a PC and transfer the files on an SDHC card to the PC.
When the camera recorder is connected to a USB cable, the message AChange to USB
ModeB appears. Select [Change] and press the Set button to switch to USB mode.
(A Page 130)
In USB mode, the camera recorder is recognized by the connected PC as a peripheral
drive (USB mass storage class only). Disable the connection on the PC and remove the
USB cable from the camera recorder to switch to Camera mode. (A Page 130)
Memo :
● When a USB cable is connected, the message appears after recording stops.
● If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed automatically,
such as when playback stops.
9
Introduction
Names of Parts
N
ML
K
J
Viewfinder (A Page 13)
A
B
F
G
H
I
LCD Monitor (A Page 13)
Zoom Lens (A Page 16)
CDE
Side Control Panel (A Page 12)
A Front Tally Lamp (A Page 30, 94)
J Monitor Speaker (Cheek Pad) (A Page 27)
B Viewfinder Cable Clamp (A Page 21)
K Shoe
C [ZEBRA ON/OFF] Zebra ON/OFF Switch (A Page 20)
For mounting separately sold lights and accessories.
[SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] Skin Area/Spot Meter Switch
(A Page 80)
L Microphone Holder Lock Knob (A Page 21)
D [AWB] Auto White Balance Button (A Page 42)
● Setting the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch (A Page 12) I
on the control panel on the right side of the camera
recorder to AAB or ABB starts up the Auto White function.
● If the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch (A Page 12) I is set
to APRESETB, you can switch the color temperature of the
preset white balance.
E Lens Lock Lever (A Page 21)
F [MONITOR SELECT] Audio Monitor Selection Switch
(A Page 46)
G [DISPLAY] Display Button (A Page 30)
H [CAM/MEDIA] Camera/Media Mode Selection Button
(A Page 8)
I [FULL AUTO] Full Auto Shooting (FAS) Switch
(A Page 81)
10
M Microphone Holder (A Page 21)
N Microphone (A Page 21)
a
Z Y X
W
W
V
O
P
Battery Adapter
(A Page 22)
SDHC Slot
(A Page 15)
QR S
T
U
Side Terminal (A Page 14)
O Back Tally Lamp (A Page 30, 94)
X [FOCUS ASSIST] Focus Assist Button (A Page 37)
P [PHONES] Earphone Connector (Φ3.5) (A Page 47)
Y Record Button Lock Switch
Q [LENS] Lens Connector (12-pin Connector)
Set the switch toward the lens to lock the [REC] trigger
button Z.
(A Page 21)
R [INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Terminal 1, 2
(XLR 3-pin ⳯ 2) (A Page 46)
S Microphone Cable Clamp (A Page 21)
Memo :
● The [REC] trigger button (A Page 12) K at the side control
panel on the right of the camera recorder is not locked.
Z [REC] Rec Trigger Button (Recording Start/Stop)
T [CH-2 INPUT] CH-2 Audio Input Terminal Selection
Starts/stops recording.
Switch
Memo :
Select the audio input terminal to record to CH-2. (A Page 46)
Memo :
● Audio from [INPUT1] terminal is input to CH-1 regardless of the
setting.
● The [REC] trigger button (A Page 12) K at the side control
panel on the right of the camera recorder is interlocked with
this button.
a Handle
U [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] Audio Input Signal Selection
Switch (A Page 46)
V Viewfinder Connector (20-pin) (A Page 21)
W Accessory Mounting Screw Hole (x2)
11
Introduction
Names of Parts (continued)
Memo :
● Set the functions of the [USER1,USER2,USER3] buttons in
the menu. (A Page 79)
● When the menu screen is displayed, these buttons function
as the menu operation buttons.
(A Page 70 [Operation Buttons])
E [MENU] Menu Button (A Page 70)
Side Control Panel
F [ND FILTER] ND Filter Switch (A Page 45)
A
B
G [STATUS] Status Screen Display Button
● Press the [STATUS] button to display the status screen on
the viewfinder and LCD monitor during normal screen
display (when the menu screen is not displayed).
(A Page 18 [Status Screen])
● Switches between [Main Menu] and [Favorites Menu] when
the [STATUS] button is pressed while the menu screen is
displayed. (A Page 70)
P
C
D
E
O
N
F
M
G
H
I
J
H [GAIN] Sensitivity Selection Switch (A Page 40)
I [WHT.BAL.] White Balance Selection Switch (A Page 42)
L
You can select one of the three white balance types.
K
J [POWER] Power ON/OFF Switch
A [VF BRIGHT] Viewfinder Luminance Adjustment Knob
(A Page 29)
Turns ON/OFF the power.
When the power is OFF, APOFFB appears on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder.
Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the power again.
B [VF PEAKING] Contour Adjustment Knob (A Page 29)
K [REC] Rec Trigger Button (Recording Start/Stop)
Memo :
Starts/stops recording.
The [REC] trigger button (A Page 11) Z on top and the
[REC] trigger button (A Page 16) of the lens are interlocked
with this button.
C [FOCUS ASSIST] Focus Assist Button
Memo :
● This knob does not function when Focus Assist is activated.
(A Page 37)
Press this button during shooting to display the focus area in
either blue, red, or green. This enables easy and accurate
focusing. (A Page 37)
D [USER1], [USER2], [USER3] User Buttons (A Page 79)
Use these buttons to switch shooting conditions according to
the object. The functions change as below according to the
operation mode (A Page 8).
During Camera mode
(Except AUX mode)
During Media mode
● When [1394 Rec Trigger] in the [Others] menu is set to
ASplitB, this button becomes the recording start/stop button
of the external equipment. (A Page 94)
(A Page 124 [Backup Recording])
L [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2]/[AUTO] CH-1/CH-2
Recording Level Adjustment Knob/Auto Indicator
(A Page 46)
M [CANCEL] Cancel Button
● Activates the function assigned to Adds/deletes OK
[USER1] in the menu.
mark.
(A Page 68)
● Loads the [TC Preset] screen
when pressed together with the
[MENU] button. (A Page 51)
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
[USER2]
Button
● Activates the function assigned to Deletes clips
[USER2] in the menu.
(A Page 66)
● Resets settings on the [TC Preset]/
[UB Preset] screen when pressed.
(A Page 51, 52)
䡵 During menu operation (all modes) (A Page 70)
Center Set button (R)
: Confirms menu items and setting
values
Cross-Shaped Button (JK) : Selects menu items and setting
values
[USER3]
Button
● Activates the function assigned to
[USER3] in the menu.
䡵 During Camera mode (Except AUX mode)
Shutter operation:
Center Set button (R)
: Shutter ON/OFF
Cross-Shaped Button (JK) : Switches shutter speed when shutter
is ON
AE level operation
: Cross-shaped button (H I)
[USER1]
Button
12
^
N Cross-Shaped Button (JKH I)/Set Button (R)
The function changes according to the operation status of
the camera recorder.
Memo :
● When [Camera Function] menu B [Switch Set] B
[AE LEVEL] is set to AAE LEVEL/VFRB, the cross-shaped
button (H I) is used to set the number of frames during
Variable Frame Rec.
(A Page 60 [Variable Frame Rec])
(A Page 80 [AE LEVEL])
䡵 During Media mode (SD Card mode) (A Page 61)
Thumbnail operation : Cross-shaped button (JKH I), center
Set button (R)
LCD Monitor
A
O Operation Mode Indicator
Lights up as below according to the operation mode.
(A Page 8)
Operation Mode
When the LCD monitor is open
Color
Camera Mode (Except AUX mode)
Blue/Purple
AUX Mode (U model only)
B
C
Blue
Media Mode (SD Card Mode)
Green
Media Mode (IEEE1394 Mode)
Orange
USB Mode
Orange
D
Memo :
● You can select whether to light up the indicator using
[Mode LED] in the [Others] menu. (A Page 94)
E F
G
A LCD Monitor (A Page 28)
P [MONITOR] Audio Monitor Level Adjustment Knob
B [LCD PEAKING +/-] LCD Contour Adjustment Button
For adjusting the volume of the monitor speaker and earphones.
(A Page 28)
C [LCD BRIGHT +/-] LCD Display Brightness
Adjustment Button (A Page 28)
Viewfinder
D [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] Audio Recording Mode
(A Page 29)
Switch (A Page 46)
E [TC DISPLAY] TC/UB Display Switch (A Page 48)
F [TC GENE.] Time Code Generator Switch (A Page 48)
A
G LCD Cover Lock Release Knob (A Page 28)
B
C
D
E
A Viewfinder Slide Lock Ring
For loosening the ring and adjusting the position of the
viewfinder E to the left or right.
B Eyepiece Focus Ring
For adjusting the visibility.
C Viewfinder Eyepiece Lock Ring
For loosening the ring and adjusting the eyepiece position of
the viewfinder to the front or back.
D Viewfinder
E Eyepiece
Prevents external light from entering the viewfinder screen
and cameraman’s vision.
13
Introduction
Names of Parts (continued)
H [PR] PR Video Signal Output Terminal (BNC)
(A Page 122)
I [DC INPUT] DC Input Terminal (A Page 22)
Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply. Connects with an
AC adapter.
J [REMOTE] Remote Terminal (A Page 131)
K [HD/SD-SDI] HD/SD-SDI Output Terminal (BNC)
(A Page 122)
Side Terminal
B
A
L [AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2] Audio Output Terminal
(RCA)
C
D
E
F
G
Q
P
Output terminal for audio signals.
● Input audio signals are output during Camera mode.
● Playback audio signals are output during Media mode.
● Audio from input audio signals is output during HD/DV signal
(IEEE1394) input.
Memo :
● Alarm tone is not output.
M [INT/EXT] IEEE1394 Interface Terminal Switch
H I JK L
M
N
(A Page 123)
O
B [PB] PB Video Signal Output Terminal (BNC)
(A Page 122)
For selecting a valid IEEE1394 interface terminal.
[EXT]
: Enables IEEE1394 signals from the [IEEE1394]
terminal Q.
[INT]
: Enables the accessory connector B at the rear
of the camera recorder. (A Page 15)
C [GENLOCK/AUX] Genlock/AUX Selection Switch
N Shoulder Pad Slide Button
(U model only) (A Page 125)
For adjusting the shoulder pad position. Press this button to
adjust the shoulder pad O position to the front or back.
A [Y/VIDEO] Y/Composite Video Signal Output
Terminal (BNC) (A Page 122)
D [GENLOCK/AUX IN] Genlock/AUX Input Terminal
(U model)/[GENLOCK INPUT] Genlock Input Terminal
(E model)
U model : For input of external synchronizing signals or
external composite video signals.
(A Page 125 [Input of Composite Video Signals
from External Device (GY-HM790CHU/GYHM790U only)])
E model : For input of external synchronizing signals.
(A Page 126 [Input of External Synchronizing
Signal (Genlock)])
O Shoulder Pad
P [USB] USB Terminal (A Page 130)
Q [IEEE1394] IEEE1394 Terminal (4-pin)
For connecting digital video equipment with IEEE1394
terminal using an IEEE1394 cable (sold separately).
To enable this terminal, set the [INT/EXT] IEEE1394 terminal
switch M to [EXT].
(A Page 123 [IEEE1394 Connection])
E [TC IN] Time Code Input Terminal (BNC)
( A Page 48 to 52)
Note :
F [TC OUT] Time Code Output Terminal (BNC)
( A Page 48 to 52)
Memo :
● When connecting IEEE1394 cables, check that the
connectors are facing the right direction before you insert.
G [STUDIO] Studio Terminal (10-pin) (A Page 128)
Connect to this terminal when combining the use of products,
such as a transmission unit, from a different manufacturer.
Pin No.
Signal
Input/
Output
^
1
NC
2
CALL TALLY
3
RM TALLY
OUT
4
RM PREVIEW
OUT
5
NC
^
6
NC
^
7
TALLY IN
IN
8
RETURN GND
^
9
RETURN IN
IN
10
GND
^
14
IN
● Put on the covers when the connectors are not in use.
SD Slot
Rear
(A Page 31)
E
D
A
A
C
A
B
B
C
A Card Slot A Status Indicator
A Shoulder Belt Mount (x2)
B [SLOT SELECT] Card Slot Selection Button
For mounting a shoulder belt (sold separately).
For switching SDHC cards.
Note :
C SDHC Card Cover
D Card Slot B Status Indicator
E [OPEN] SDHC Card Cover Open/Close Knob
● Be sure to use a shoulder belt with the strength to withstand
the weight of this camera recorder.
● If the shoulder belt is not properly attached, the camera
recorder may fall and cause injuries.
● Check the instruction manual provided with the shoulder belt
before using.
B Accessory Connection Terminal
Terminal for connecting a KA-MR100G (Memory Recorder :
sold separately) or KA-M790G (Multicore Remote Adapter :
sold separately) unit.
Memo :
● When using this terminal, make sure that the Battery
Adapter C is removed.
C Battery Adapter (A Page 22)
The shape is different for GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U and
GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E.
* The above is the illustration for GY-HM790CHE/GYHM790E.
15
Introduction
Names of Parts (continued)
Zoom Lens
C B
To operate zoom servo with the zoom servo control lever, set
the [ZOOM] switch M to ASERVOB.
● Zooms into wide angle and increases the angle of view
when AWB is pressed.
● Zooms into telephoto and decreases the angle of view when
ATB is pressed.
● Zoom speed increases when the lever is pressed hard.
H Iris Mode Switch
(Supplied with GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)
CANON KT14 x 4.4KRSJ
G Zoom Servo Control Lever
A : Auto iris operation mode.
M : Manual iris operation mode.
A
I Iris Momentary Button
Press and hold this button to change to auto iris mode when
the iris mode switch H is set at AMB.
J [I.G.] Iris Speed Adjustment Knob
IRIS
AM
T
RET
W
If the speed is set too fast, opening/closing of the iris
becomes unstable and hunting may occur. Readjust the
speed in this case.
REC
K Filter Built-In Screw
DE
A transparent or UV filter for lens protection can be installed
inside the lens hood from the front. Filters for various effects
can also be used.
● Installable filter types
F G HI J
M
When installed on the hood
: 82 mm P0.75
When installed on the lens body : 72 mm P0.75
L Zoom Servo Connector
For connecting a zoom servo unit (sold separately).
M [ZOOM] Zoom Switch
SERVO
MANU.
SERVO
ZOOM
K
L
M
N O
A Focus Ring
B Zoom Lever/Ring
To operate zoom with this lever, turn the [ZOOM] switch M
and set it to AMANU.B.
C Iris Ring
To operate auto iris, set the iris mode switch H to AAB.
D Lens Cable
E [REC] Record Trigger Button
Starts/stops recording.
F [RET] Return Video Button
Press this button to play back and check the latest clip,
according to the settings under [Clip Review] of [Switch Set]
in the [Camera Function] menu. (A Page 79)
(A Page 56 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip
Review)])
Memo :
● When [LENS RET] of [Switch Set...] in the [Camera Function]
menu is set to AFocus AssistB, this button functions as the
Focus Assist button. When it is set to AReturnB, a return
video is displayed. (A Page 79)
16
MANU.
: Enables zooming with the zoom servo control
lever G.
: Enables zooming with the zoom lever/ring B.
N Back Focus Ring/Lock Screw
Exclusive ring for adjusting the back focus. After adjusting,
secure with a lock screw.
(A Page 28 [Adjusting Back Focus])
O [M] Macro Focus Ring (for close-ups)
Turn the ring in the direction of the arrow to take close-up
shots of small objects.
Normal focusing and zooming cannot be performed in macro
mode.
To take macro shots
● Set focus ring A to infinity (n).
● Set zoom ring B to the maximum wide angle.
● Rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow to adjust
focus on the object.
Note :
● As the back focus knob is located nearby, be careful not to
mistake the two knobs.
● Do not forget to restore the macro ring to its original position
after use. (A Page 28 [Adjusting Back Focus])
Basic System Diagram
Shoulder Belt
SDI Cable
BNC
Component Cable
BNC
Monitor
Composite Cable
BNC
Earphone
Audio Cable
RCA pin
Focus Manual Unit
HZ-FM13 (FUJINON)
HZ-FM15 (CANON)
Monitor
Microphone
External Recording
Device
IEEE1394 Cable
4P-6P
1/3 Zoom Lens
Th13x3.5BRMU(FUJINON)
For GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U
VTR
PL Mount
Film Lens
16 mm PL Mount
Film Lens adapter
HZ-CA13U
1/3 Zoom Lens
KT14x4.4KRSJ (CANON)
(GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)
Anton Bauer
Anton Bauer Battery Charger
Battery
(Dionic90)
Battery Adapter
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U : Gold Mount
GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E : V Mount
BR-HD50U/E*
For GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E*
Non-linear Editing
System
Zoom Servo Control
HZ-ZS13B
1/2 Zoom Lens
IDX
Battery Charger
IDX Battery
(Endura)
Standard Package
Mount Converter
(1/2 B 1/3):ACM-12
XLR 4P
Tripod Base
KA-551U
AC
AC Adapter
Carrying Case
Remote Control Unit
RM-LP25U/RM-LP55U/
RM-LP57U
2/3 Zoom Lens
Mount Converter
(2/3 B1/3): ACM-17
Tripod
USB Cable
SDHC Memory Card
Non-linear Editing
System
SDHC Card Reader
Memory Recorder
KA-MR100G
Headset
(Beyerdynamic)
Studio Viewfinder
VF-HP790G
Multicore Remote Adapter
KA-M790G
Remote Control Unit
RM-LP25U
(Connection is possible only
when RM-HP250AU/RMHP250DE* is used.)
Monitor
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P250
Studio Adapter
KA-790G
TALLY
CALL
FULL AUTO
F1
BARS
F2
F3
MENU/SHUTTER
GAIN
SHUTTER
PAINT
WHITE
PUSH-ON
PUSH-ON
LOW
POWER
B
MID
VARIABLE
IRIS
W.BAL
HIGH
MENU
MASTER BLACK
AUTO
STEP
SHUTTER
F4
I
A
R
B
PRESET
AUTO
MANU
GAIN
INTERCOM
LEVEL
O
DOWN
UP
DOWN
UP
CLOSE
OPEN
Remote Control Unit
RM-P210U/E*/RM-HP250AU/RM-HP250DE*
* Models with an E suffix are for the European market and the UL Listing mark is not applicable.
17
Introduction
Displays on the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
You can display the camera status, media information, zebra
pattern, and various markers in the video image on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screens during shooting.
Besides camera and playback images, the following
characters are displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
LCD monitor display
The display switches between the 5 screen types with every press
of the [STATUS] button. (STATUS 0 B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 0)
Press the [DISPLAY] button to switch to the enlarged status
display screen. (A Page 19)
* The STATUS 0 screen is skipped in the AUX mode
(U model only).
30/24 fps
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
䡵 Status screen (A Page 18)
䡵 Auto White display* (A Page 20)
F5.6
STBY
䡵 Menu setting screen (A Page 20)
S.DTL
B -3
A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
STATUS 0 Screen
䡵 Alarm display (A Page 20)
䡵 Marker and safety zone indicators* (A Page 112)
1280x720 30/24 fps
24p HQ
00:00:00:00
䡵 Zebra pattern display (A Page 20)
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
* Displayed in Camera mode only (Except AUX mode)
Memo :
● When [Analog Out Char.]/[SDI Out Char.] in the [A/V Out]
menu is set to AOnB, the status screen and menu screen are
also displayed in the video image of the video signal output
terminal. (A Page 92)
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
282min
F5.6
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
STATUS 1 Screen
CAMERA INFORMATION
SETUP FILE
ZEBRA1
ZEBRA2
AUDIO
FORMAT
MEDIA
Viewfinder
SCENE
[ SCENE
]
50%~100%
70%~80%
CH1
CH2
QuickTime
A 125min
B123min
282min
STBY
Jan 2. 2009 01:23:45AM
STATUS 2 Screen
[DISPLAY]
Button
SWITCH ASSIGN
FAW
NONE
GAIN [ L / M / H ] 0dB / 9dB / 12dB
USER 1
BARS
USER 2
B.STRETCH3
USER 3
LOAD FILE
RET
CLIP REVIEW
SKIN/SPOT
SPOT METER
AELEVEL
AE LEVEL/VFR
[STATUS]
Button
STBY
282min
Jan 2. 2009 01:23:45AM
STATUS 3 Screen
LCD Monitor
30/24 fps
Status Screen
This screen allows you to check the current settings.
To display the status screen, press the [STATUS] button in
the normal screen.
The status display differs according to the operation mode
(4 types). (A Page 8 [Operation Mode])
䡵 Status Screen in Camera Mode
(A Page 102)
Viewfinder display
The display switches between the 5 screen types with every press
of the [STATUS] button. (STATUS 0 B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 0)
* The STATUS 0 screen is skipped in the AUX mode
(U model only).
18
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
STBY
STATUS 4 Screen
Press [DISPLAY]
Press [DISPLAY]
CH1
CH2
DF
FREE
STBY
A
1280 x 720
min 24p HQ
B 100 min
282min
STATUS 1 Enlarged Display Screen (LCD monitor only)
䡵 Status Screen (VF/LCD) During Clip
Playback in Media Mode (SD Card Mode)
(A Page 108)
䡵 Status Screen in USB Mode
This screen displays the USB mode.
The display switches between the 3 screen types with every
press of the [STATUS] button. (STATUS 0 B 1 B 2 B 0)
Enlarged Status Display on LCD Monitor
STATUS 0 Screen
You can enlarge and display only the characters of the status
screen on the LCD monitor. (Camera mode only)
CH1
CH2
DF
FREE
STBY
STATUS 1 Screen
A
1280 x 720
min 24p HQ
282min
B 100 min
[DISPLAY] Button
STATUS 2 Screen
䡵 Status Screen in Media Mode
(IEEE1394 Mode) (A Page 109)
The display switches between the 2 screen types with every
press of the [STATUS] button. (STATUS 0 B 1 B 0)
1 Set [LCD + VF] in the [LCD/VF] menu to AOnB.
(A Page 88)
2 Press the [DISPLAY] button while the LCD screen is
displayed.
STATUS 0 Screen
The display switches between the same display as the
viewfinder and the enlarged display with every press of the
button.
Memo :
● During enlarged display of the status on the LCD monitor
screen, the video image remains displayed on the
viewfinder.
1280x720
24p HQ
282min
STATUS 1 Screen
19
Introduction
Displays on the LCD Monitor
and Viewfinder (continued)
Auto White Display (Camera Mode Only,
Excluding AUX Mode)
Alarm Display
● Alarm is displayed during the status screen display in
Camera mode (STATUS 0, 1, 4) and Media mode. If the
alarm sounds during STATUS 2 or 3 screen display in
Camera mode, the display will return to STATUS 0 screen
and alarm will be displayed.
(A Page 134 [Error Displays and Actions])
Displays the operation and result when Auto White Balance is
activated.
(A Page 42 [Adjusting the White Balance])
30/24 fps
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
A 1min
B 1min
STBY
RES
F5.6
S.DTL
B -3
A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
Alarm Display Area
Zebra Pattern Display
Menu Setting Screen
For configuring various settings.
Press the [MENU] button to display the menu setting screen.
(A Page 70 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen])
Two types of zebra patterns that indicate the luminance level
of the video image can be displayed on this camera recorder.
You can set the luminance levels for displaying the two types
of zebra patterns.
(A Page 54 [Setting Zebra Pattern])
Zebra Pattern
[Main Menu] Screen
Memo :
● Use the [ZEBRA ON/OFF] switch in front to turn ON/OFF the
zebra pattern display.
● Set the display pattern and luminance level in [LCD/VF]
menu B [Shooting Assist] B [Zebra]. (A Page 89)
20
Preparations
Attaching Accessories
Knob
Microphone
Microphone Holder
Attaching the Zoom Lens
(Supplied with GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)
Clamp
Hole
1
3
Pin
[INPUT1/INPUT2] Terminal
REC
2
Clamp
4
1 Loosen the mount ring.
2 Attach the zoom lens such that the pin matches the
hole of the mounting area.
3 Tighten the mount ring.
Attaching the Viewfinder (Supplied)
1 Slide the viewfinder in the direction of the arrow to
attach it.
2 Turn the slide lock ring to secure the position of the
viewfinder.
Slide Lock Ring
2
4 Connect the cable connector.
5 Attach the lens cable to the clamp.
Memo :
● Tighten the mount ring completely. If it is not fully tightened,
the lens may drop or the back focus may be out of alignment.
● When attaching or removing the zoom lens, set the
[POWER] switch of the camera recorder to AOFFB.
1
Viewfinder
3 Attach the viewfinder cable to the viewfinder terminal.
Attaching the Microphone (Supplied)
4 Pin the viewfinder cable to the clamp.
You can attach the supplied microphone to the microphone
holder.
The supplied microphone has a phantom power supply.
1 Turn the knob on the microphone holder
anticlockwise to loosen and open the microphone
holder.
2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder.
4
Clamp
3
3 Turn the knob on the microphone holder clockwise to
secure the microphone.
4 Connect the microphone cable to the [INPUT1] or
[INPUT2] terminal.
5 Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.
6 Make sure to perform the correct settings for the
phantom microphone (A Page 46).
21
Preparations
䡵 Charging the Built-In Battery
Power Supply
To use this camera recorder, you can attach a battery pack or
connect an AC adapter to it.
(A Page 22 [Using a Battery Pack])
(A Page 22 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)])
Note :
● Set the [POWER] switch to AOFFB before changing the
power supply that operates this camera recorder.
The date/time and time code data are stored using the
built-in rechargeable battery.
When power is connected to the camera recorder, the
built-in battery always gets charged. When the power is
disconnected, the battery gradually discharges.
The battery will be totally discharged if left unused for 3
months and the date/time and time code data will be reset.
When this happens, set the [POWER] switch to AONB to
display the [Initial Setting] screen, then set the date/time.
(A Page 26 [Setting the Clock (Initial Setting)])
Using a Battery Pack
Using AC Power
(DC IN Power)
Recommended Batteries
Use an AC adapter (sold separately) to operate the camera
recorder with AC power.
1 Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to the
[DC INPUT] terminal of the camera recorder.
Check that the power of the camera recorder and the AC
adapter is turned AOFFB and connect as shown in the
diagram.
U model : Dionic90 (Anton Bauer)
E model : Endura-HL9 (IDX)
* Models with an E suffix are for the European market and
the UL Listing mark is not applicable.
Note :
● Make use of the recommended batteries. Heavy batteries
may fall off if not used correctly.
● See the battery instruction manual on how to charge the
battery.
Battery Operating Time
The following are the approximate times for continuous
operation on fully-charged batteries.
[DC INPUT]
Battery
Approx. 2.75 h
Approx. 2.75 h
● Actual operating times may differ depending on the age of
the battery, charging condition, and operating environment.
● Operating time is shortened in cold environment.
● The operating time may shorten when power zoom is used,
accessories are connected, or when the LCD monitor is
frequently used.
DC OUTPUT
AC Adapter
2 Set the [POWER] switch of the camera recorder to
AONB after turning on the AC adapter.
Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.
Note :
● Do not insert or remove the DC cable during recording.
● Do not use power supply of high voltage fluctuation,
containing noise such as ripple, or with insufficient capacity.
22
Dionic90 (U model)
Endura-HL9 (E model)
Memo :
DC Cable
Continuous Operating Time
(At 25 f)
Precautions for the Battery Operation
● Do not remove the battery when the [POWER] switch is
AONB.
● Do not insert or remove the DC cable when the battery is in
use.
● Leaving the camera recorder unused with the battery inside
will deplete the battery power even if you set the [POWER]
switch to AOFFB. Remove the battery if you are not using the
camera recorder.
Attaching the Battery
(GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E)
Use the Endura-HL9 (IDX) battery.
1 Attach the battery
Face the terminal downward and attach the V mount of the
battery onto the V mount attachment bracket of the camera
recorder.
V Mount Attachment Bracket
V Mount
Attaching the Battery
(GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U)
Use the Dionic90 (Anton Bauer) battery.
1 Align the battery guide pins (x3) with the battery,
adapter, and guide hole, and insert straight.
Guide Hole (x3)
Guide Pins
Release Lever
2 Press down the battery until it snaps into place.
䡵 Detaching the Battery
Press down the release lever and slide the battery upward to
detach it from the camera recorder.
Release Button
Battery
LCD Screen Side
Memo :
Battery
● If the guide pins are not inserted straight, the battery will
not be attached correctly.
2 Slide the battery toward the SDHC card cover side
panel until it snaps into place.
䡵 Detaching the Battery
Press down the release lever and slide the battery toward
you to detach it from the camera recorder.
Release Lever
Battery
23
Preparations
Using a Battery Pack
(continued)
Power Status Display
䡵 Warnings by Lamps and Alarm Tones
● Warning status is indicated by tally lamps and alarm tones.
● The front and back tally lamps of the camera recorder
blink.
● Alarm tone is output from the monitor speaker or
[PHONES] terminal.
Memo :
The power status is displayed on the status and menu
screens. If the battery or supplied voltage from the AC
adapter is low, a warning will be displayed in red.
● If you continue to use the camera recorder while the
power warning is displayed, the camera recorder will stop
automatically when the battery or supplied voltage from
the AC adapter becomes lower.
● Alarm tone is not output during recording.
Note :
Note :
䡵 Viewfinder and LCD Monitor Screens
● If the battery in use is not a recommended one, the battery
mark which indicates the battery level may not appear.
䡵 Status Screen
(A Page 102 [Status Screen in Camera Mode])
(A Page 108 [Status Screen in SD Card Mode])
(A Page 109 [Status Screen in IEEE1394 Input Mode])
1280x720 30/24 fps
24p HQ
00:00:00:00
Precautions for Batteries
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
RES
● The remaining battery power and time are displayed as
there are from the battery information. Accurate data may
not be displayed according to the battery condition. Replace
the battery as soon as possible when the remaining battery
power and time are low.
F5.6
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
䡵 Enlarged status display on the LCD monitor
(A Page 110)
● Store the battery in a cool and dry place when not in use.
Do not expose the battery to high temperatures (such as in a
car under direct sunlight). This will cause battery leakage
and shorten the battery life.
● Operating time is shortened if the battery terminal is dirty.
● If the operating time shortens drastically even after charging,
the battery may be reaching the end of its life. Replace the
battery with a new one.
CH1
CH2
Charging
DF
FREE
STBY
A
1280 x 720
min 24p HQ
B 100 min
䡵 Menu screen (A Page 70)
24
RES
● Use up the charge completely before you charge the battery.
If the battery is not fully discharged before charging, the
battery capacity may drop after repeated cycles.
● If the battery capacity drops due to repetitive shallow
charging and discharging, it may be recovered by using up
the charge completely and then fully charging the battery
again.
● If you charge the battery immediately after using while the
battery is still warm, it may not be fully charged.
● It is recommended that you charge the battery in an
environment between 10 f and 35 f. The battery may not
be fully charged or the charging time may be prolonged if
charged under low temperatures (below 10 f).
Turning On/Off the Power
䡵 Camera Mode (Except AUX Mode)
Camera images are output on the viewfinder and LCD
monitor. When a recordable SDHC card is inserted, the
camera recorder enters the recording standby mode.
ASTBYB appears on the operation mode display area of the
LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.
Memo :
Turning On the Power
● Playback of SDHC card is not possible in Camera mode.
However, you can use the Clip Review function to check the
most recently recorded video clip. (A Page 56)
1 Set the [POWER] switch to AONB.
The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode.
Memo :
● The camera recorder always start up in Camera mode
when the [POWER] switch is set to AONB.
● Press the [CAM/MEDIA] button to switch to a different mode.
The operation mode indicator changes as below. While in
the Camera mode, setting the [GENLOCK/AUX] selection
switch to AAUXB switches the camera recorder to the AUX
mode. (U model only)
See [Operation Mode] (A Page 8) for details of each
operation mode.
● During Camera mode (Except AUX
mode)
: Lights up in blue/purple
● AUX Mode (U model only)
: Blue
䡵 AUX Mode (U model only)
This is a mode for recording composite videos from an
external device. When a recordable SDHC card is inserted,
the camera recorder enters the recording standby mode.
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.
Composite videos from the external device are output to the
viewfinder and LCD monitor.
Memo :
● [System Definition] is fixed at ASD (DV)B in the AUX mode.
(A Page 56)
䡵 Media Mode (SD Card Mode)
● During Media mode (SD Card mode)
: Lights up in green
● Media Mode (IEEE1394 Input Mode)
: Lights up in orange
● During USB mode
: Lights up in orange
● During mode switching
: Blinks in the color of the
new mode
Memo :
● The camera recorder will switch to IEEE1394 Input mode
only when the IEEE1394-connected equipment is in
operation.
This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded
on the SDHC card.
When a playable SDHC card is inserted, the thumbnail or
playback screen is output on the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.
䡵 Media Mode (IEEE1394 Input Mode)
This mode allows you to check IEEE1394 input signals.
When playable IEEE1394 signals are input, input images are
output on the viewfinder and LCD monitor. IEEE1394 input
signals cannot be recorded.
Turning Off the Power
[CAM/MEDIA] Button
[MENU] Button
Cross-Shaped
Button
(JKH I)
Set Button (R)
[CANCEL]
Button
Set the camera recorder to the recording standby or stop
mode.
1 Set the [POWER] switch to AOFFB.
2 Remove the battery and the power to the [DC INPUT]
terminal (when not in use for a long time).
Note :
[REC] Button
[POWER] Switch
● Do not set the [POWER] switch to AOFFB during
recording. Check that the operation mode display is
ASTBYB or ASTOPB before you turn off the power.
● If you have mistakenly set the [POWER] switch to AOFFB
during recording, wait for 5 seconds or more before you
turn on the power again.
● When turning off the power, first set the [POWER] switch
of the camera recorder to AOFFB. Do not remove the
battery or turn off the AC power while the [POWER] switch
is set to AONB.
25
Preparations
2 Specify [Time Zone] and [Date/Time].
Setting the Clock
(Initial Setting)
A Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button (H I) and
select the setting item.
B Change the values with the cross-shaped button (JK).
Set the date/time of the built-in clock in the [Initial Setting]
screen. The configured date/time data is saved in the
built-in rechargeable battery even if the power is turned off.
3 Press the Set button after setting is complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/time.
Memo :
Setting the Clock in the [Initial Setting]
Screen
The [Initial Setting] screen appears when the power is turned
on for the first time and when the built-in battery is turned on
again after being fully discharged.
All operations are disabled until initial settings are complete.
● The configured date/time data can be displayed on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder and be recorded to the SDHC card.
● The value of the year can be set in the range of A2000B to
A2099B.
Changing the Time after Initial Setting
䡵 Setting the date/time (A Page 95)
1 Select [Others] menu B [Date/Time].
[MENU] Button
The [Date/Time] setting screen appears.
Cross-Shaped
Button
(JKH I)
Set Button
(R)
[POWER] Switch
1 Set the [POWER] switch to AONB.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears.
䡵 For GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U
2 Set the date and time.
A Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button (H I) and
select the setting item.
B Change the values with the cross-shaped button (JK).
3 Press the Set button (R) after setting is complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/time.
䡵 For GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E
26
Changing the Display Style
You can change the display style of the date/time on the
menu.
Adjusting the Monitor
Speaker
Memo :
● To perform the settings while looking at the monitor
screen connected to the video signal output terminal, set
[Analog Out Char.] or [SDI Out Char.] in the [A/V Out]
menu to AOnB. (A Page 92)
The monitor speaker can be rotated 180 degrees.
Adjust according to the position of your ear.
180 Degrees Rotation
䡵 Setting the date style (Date Style) (A Page 91)
A Select [LCD/VF] menu B [Status Display] menu B
[Date Style].
B Select the date display style.
[Setting values : YMD (year, month, day), MDY (month,
day, year), DMY (day, month, year)]
Monitor
Speaker
C Press the Set button (R).
䡵 Setting the time style (Time Style) (A Page 91)
A Select [LCD/VF] menu B [Status Display] menu B
[Time Style].
B Select the time display style.
[Setting values : 12hour (12 hour display), 24hour (24
hour display)]
C Press the Set button (R).
Date/Time Display in Different Operation
Modes
During Camera mode
During AUX mode
(U model)
Date/time of the built-in clock is
displayed.
During Media mode
(SD Card mode)
Shooting date/time of the clip being
played back is displayed.
During Media mode
(IEEE1394 mode)
Date/time is not displayed.
[MONITOR] Level Adjustment Knob
Memo :
● Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker with the
[MONITOR] level adjustment knob at the side control
panel on the right of the camera recorder. Various warning
alarm tones may also be output repeatedly. (A Page 135)
Note :
● The rotation angle of the monitor speaker is 180 degrees.
Do not over-rotate the monitor speaker.
27
Preparations
Adjusting Back Focus
5 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus of the object.
6 Set the lens to the maximum wide angle position.
7 Loosen the lock screw of the back focus ring.
When the lens is first attached, adjust the back focus of the
lens if the focus is not clear when zoomed to the telephoto or
wide angle end.
● Place an object 3 m and above away from the camera
recorder.
● The Siemens Star Chart is most suitable as the object.
3 4, 6
5
8 Shoot the same object and secure the back focus ring
at the position where the object is in focus.
9 Repeat steps 4 to 8 three times until the object is in
focus at both the telephoto and wide angle positions.
10 Tighten and secure the lock screw of the back focus
ring.
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
and Viewfinder
IRIS
AM
T
W
RET
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
You can change the angle and brightness of the LCD monitor
screen according to your usage condition.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not affect the
recorded images.
1
M
[LCD BRIGHT +/-] Button
LCD Lock Release Knob
1
2 7, 8, 10
2
Tilt 180 degrees
upward
Tilt 90 degrees
downward [LCD PEAKING +/-] Button
䡵 Adjusting the Angle of the LCD Monitor
Siemens Star Chart
1 Set the iris mode switch of the lens to AMB (manual).
2 Set the zoom mode switch to AMANU.B (manual).
3 Turn to open the iris ring.
Adjust the lighting such that the optimum image level can be
obtained.
4 Turn the zoom lever to set the lens to the maximum
telephoto position.
28
1 Slide the LCD lock release knob to open the LCD
monitor.
2 Rotate the LCD monitor to adjust the angle.
● While the LCD monitor is open, you can rotate it 180
degrees upward or 90 degrees downward.
● Rotating the LCD monitor 180 degrees upward enables
you to see the screen from the lens side. To display the
image when it is viewed from the opposite direction
(mirror image), perform setting as follows.
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] menu B Set [LCD Mirror Mode]
to AMirrorB B Press Set button (R) (A Page 88)
䡵 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Screen
[VF PEAKING] Knob
[VF BRIGHT] Knob
Adjusting contour and brightness
● Use the [LCD BRIGHT +/-] button to adjust the brightness
of the LCD monitor screen. Press the [+] and [-] buttons
simultaneously to return to standard settings.
Eyepiece Focus Ring
Eyepiece
[+] : Press this button to brighten the screen.
[-] : Press this button to darken the screen.
Slide Lock Ring
● During adjustment, the brightness level is displayed on
the LCD monitor screen.
● During Camera mode, SD Card mode (playback), or
IEEE1394 mode
Eyepiece
Lock Ring
● During SD Card mode (thumbnail), menu operation, or
USB mode
Note :
● Use the [LCD PEAKING +/-] button to adjust the contour of
the LCD monitor screen. Press the [+] and [-] buttons
simultaneously to return to standard settings.
[+] : Press the button to increase contour correction.
[-] : Press the button to decrease contour correction.
● During adjustment, the contour level is displayed on the
LCD monitor screen.
(A Page 29 [Adjusting contour and brightness])
● During Camera mode, SD Card mode (playback), or
IEEE1394 mode
● A high-definition viewfinder is used on this camera
recorder in order to provide an accurate focusing
environment. Due to the characteristic of the display
device, colors may appear on the images when you blink
your eyes. This is not a malfunction. It does not affect the
recorded images, SDI output, or component output.
䡵 Adjusting the Angle
Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder.
䡵 Adjusting the Visibility
Turn the eyepiece focus ring to sharpen the image on the
viewfinder screen.
● During SD Card mode (thumbnail), menu operation, or
USB mode
䡵 Adjusting the Viewfinder Screen
Adjusting contour and brightness
● Use the [VF BRIGHT] knob to adjust the brightness of the
viewfinder screen.
● Use the [VF PEAKING] knob to adjust the contour of the
viewfinder screen.
T Screen display during adjustment
Adjusting the Viewfinder
You can change the brightness and peaking of the viewfinder
screen according to your usage conditions.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not affect the
recorded images.
(A Page 29 [Adjusting contour and brightness])
Displaying in black and white (A Page 88)
You can display the viewfinder screen in black and white.
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] menu B [VF Display] item B
Press Set button (R) B Select AB & WB B Press Set button (R)
29
Preparations
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
and Viewfinder (continued)
䡵 When [LCD + VF] in the [LCD/VF] Menu
is Set to AOnB (A Page 88)
Displays on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens (VF)
are indicated as below.
LCD Monitor Status
Closed LCD
Displays on the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder Screens
Opened LCD
LCD Display
VF Display
Normal LCD
OFF
ON
Inversed LCD
ON
ON
Normal LCD
ON
ON
Inversed LCD
ON
ON
Memo :
● Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds to turn
ON/OFF the LCD monitor screen.
● The function to turn ON/OFF the LCD monitor screen by
pressing the [DISPLAY] button can be canceled by
opening/closing or rotating the LCD monitor.
● The viewfinder screen is always displayed.
[DISPLAY] Button
Tally Lamps
Normal LCD
Inversed LCD
LCD opened at
40 degrees
LCD closed at 40
and above
degrees and below
䡵 When [LCD + VF] in the [LCD/VF] Menu
is Set to AOffB (A Page 88)
These are indicator lamps for recording and warning. The
operation changes according to the menu settings. When the
battery or remaining space on the SDHC card is low, the
lamps blink. (Camera mode only)
Set using [Tally System]/[Front Tally]/[Back Tally] in the [Main
Menu] B [Others] menu. (A Page 94)
Front Tally Lamp
Displays on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens (VF)
are indicated as below.
LCD Monitor Status
Closed LCD
Opened LCD
LCD Display
VF Display
Normal LCD
OFF
ON
Inversed LCD
ON
OFF
Normal LCD
ON
OFF
Inversed LCD
ON
OFF
Memo :
● Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds to
switch the display between the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screens.
● The function to switch between LCD monitor and
viewfinder displays by pressing the [DISPLAY] button can
be canceled by opening/closing or rotating the LCD
monitor.
● When the LCD monitor is stored in the camera recorder in
the direction of normal display, pressing of the [DISPLAY]
button will not work.
● You can display both the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screens at the same time by selecting [LCD + VF] in the
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 88)
30
Back Tally Lamp
[Tally System]
^
[Front Tally]/
[Back Tally] *1
Off
On
Blin
k
On
Camera
Recorder
Information
Warning
^
^
J
Alarm
^
^
o
External
Device
Information
Warning
^
^
Camera
Recorder
Recording
Status
Recording
^
Special
Recording *3
Menu
Setting
External
Device
Recording
Status
Remote
Control Unit
Input
Alarm
[Int]
[Ext]
[Studio]
Blink
On
Blink
^
J
^
J
^
o*2
^
o
^
^
J
^
^
R
R
^
^
^
^
^
R
R
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
R
R
^
^
SDHC Card Cover Knob
Slot B Status Indicator
SDHC Card
Cover
Slot A Status
Indicator
[SLOT SELECT]
Button
Recording
[CALL]
^
^
^
^
^
o
o
[TALLY(PGM)]
^
^
^
^
^
R
R
[TALLY(PVW)]
^
^
^
^
^
X
X
R : Lights up
J : Blinks four times in 1 second
o:
Blinks once in 1 second
X : Only back tally lamp lights up
*1 : [Front Tally] and [Back Tally] can be set independently
with the menu settings. (A Page 94)
*2 : Only battery alarm is displayed.
*3 : Paused state during special recording ([Clip
Continuous]). (A Page 59)
Memo :
● Blinking takes priority over lighting up.
SDHC Cards
䡵 Estimated Recordable Time of SDHC
Cards
The estimated recordable time is only a guide. Differences
may occur depending on the SDHC card in use and the
battery condition.
(A Page 75 [Camera Resolution])
(A Page 75 [Frame & Bit Rate])
SDHC Card Size
Camera
Resolution
Bit Rate
4 GB
8 GB
16 GB
32 GB
1280x720
1440x1080
1920x1080
HQ
12 min
25 min
50 min
100 min
1440x1080
SP
17 min
35 min
70 min
140 min
1280x720
SP
22 min
45 min
90 min
180 min
720 x 480
--
15 min
30 min
60 min
120 min
720 x 576
--
15 min
30 min
60 min
120 min
Memo :
This camera recorder saves the recorded images and audio
sound on the SDHC card (sold separately) in the card slot.
Memo :
● If the SDHC card contains files recorded by devices other
than this camera recorder or files that are saved from a
PC, the recordable time may be shorter or data may not
be properly recorded.
● If the SDHC card contains files recorded by devices other
than this camera recorder or files that are saved from a
PC, the recordable time may be shorter or data may not
be properly recorded.
䡵 Write-Protect Switch on the SDHC Card
A Slide the write-protect switch upward to enable writing or
deleting.
SDHC Cards to Use
B Slide the write-protect switch downward to prevent writing
Use a Class 6/10 SDHC card (4 GB - 32 GB).
or deleting. (Images in the card are protected.)
Note :
Write-Protect Switch
● Using cards other than those from Panasonic, TOSHIBA
or SanDisk may result in recording failure or data loss.
A
B
Write/Delete Enabled
Write/Delete Disabled
31
Preparations
SDHC Cards (continued)
2
1
3
Inserting an SDHC Card
4
This camera recorder comes with two card slots for video/
audio recording and playback (Slot A and B).
1 Slide the SDHC card cover knob of the desired slot in
the direction of the arrow and open the cover.
2 Insert an SDHC card with the notched corner first.
3 Close the SDHC card cover.
1
Notched Corner
SDHC Card
2
3
䡵 Card Slot Status Indicator
The following table shows the respective states of slot A and B.
Lamp
Lights up in red
Slot Status
Inserted SDHC card is being accessed.
(writing/reading data)
Do not turn off the power of the camera
recorder or remove the SDHC card.
Lights up in green
On standby. Inserted SDHC card can be
used for recording or playback.
Light goes out
● SDHC card is not inserted.
Memo :
● When both slots are inserted with usable SDHC cards, the
previously selected slot is used.
Note :
● Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the camera
recorder or remove the SDHC card when it is being
accessed. All data recorded on the card, including the file
that is being accessed, may be corrupted. Be sure to
check whether the status indicator is lighted in green or
not before you turn off the power or remove the SDHC
card.
● If you mistakenly remove the card when it is being
accessed, reinsert the card only after the status indicator
goes off.
● The SDHC card may not be recognized if you insert and
remove the card within a short time. When this happens,
remove the card and wait for a few seconds before you
reinsert.
Switching SDHC cards
When both card slots are inserted with SDHC cards, you can
use the [SLOT SELECT] button to switch the card to use.
When the memory on an SDHC card is full during recording,
data recording automatically switches to the other card.
[SLOT SELECT] Button
● An unusable card is inserted.
● An SDHC card is inserted but a different
slot is selected.
Removing the SDHC Card
1 Check that the SDHC card to be removed is not being
accessed (lights up in red).
2 Slide the SDHC card cover knob in the direction of the
arrow and open the cover.
3 Push the SDHC card and remove it from the slot.
4 Close the SDHC card cover.
32
Cross-Shaped
Button
(JKH I)
Set Button (R)
[CANCEL] Button
Note :
● The [SLOT SELECT] button is disabled during recording
or playback. Cards will not be switched even if you press
the button.
6 Formatting is complete.
Formatting (Initializing) SDHC Cards
ACompleteB appears when formatting is complete.
When the following cards are inserted,
AFORMATTING REQUIREDB appears. Format the card
using the camera recorder menu.
Memo :
● Unformatted SDHC cards
● SDHC cards formatted under different specifications
* For details of the menu operation, see
[Basic Operations in Menu Screen] (A Page 70).
Note :
● Be sure to format the SDHC card on this camera recorder.
SDHC cards formatted on a PC and other peripheral
equipment cannot be used on this camera recorder.
Memo :
● To cancel the message display, press the [CANCEL]
button. A [!] mark appears at the remaining media display
area when an SDHC card that requires formatting is
inserted.
1 Select [Format Media] in the [Media] menu.
(A Page 97)
● If you do not want to format the card, select [Cancel] or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the previous
screen.
● If you remove the SDHC card during formatting,
AFormat Error!B appears and the camera recorder returns
to the previous screen.
● During formatting, menu operation is unavailable but you
can start recording. However, this is only available when a
recordable SDHC card is inserted in the other slot.
● Formatting cannot be performed in the following cases.
● Recording is in progress on the SDHC card to be
formatted.
● SDHC card is not inserted.
● Write-protect switch of the SDHC card is set (
displayed).
is
Note :
● If you format the SDHC card, all data recorded on the
card, including video data and setup files, will be deleted.
2 Select the slot of the SDHC card to be formatted and
press the Set button (R).
2
3 The status of the selected SDHC card appears.
4 Select [Format] and press the Set button (R).
4
5 Formatting starts.
33
Preparations
SDHC Cards (continued)
4 Restoring is complete.
● When restoring is complete, ACompleteB appears and the
camera recorder returns to the [Restore Media] screen.
● When no media that requires restoring is inserted, the
camera recorder returns to the [Media] menu screen.
Restoring the SDHC Card
It is necessary to restore the SDHC card if an abnormality
occurs to the data in the card due to some reasons.
The message ARESTORE MEDIAB appears on the LCD
monitor/viewfinder screen when an SDHC card that requires
restoring is inserted.
Memo :
● To cancel the message display, press the [CANCEL]
button. A [!] mark appears at the remaining media display
area when an SDHC card that requires formatting is
inserted.
1 Select [Restore Media] in the [Media] menu. (A
Page 97)
2 Select the SDHC card to be restored and press the Set
button (R).
2
3 Restoring starts.
34
Note :
● [Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera mode.
However, it cannot be selected while the camera recorder
is recording. Select [Restore Media] in Camera mode
when the camera recorder is not recording.
● [Restore Media] does not restore the SDHC card to its
original states completely. If restoring fails, replace or
format the SDHC card. Take note that formatting the
SDHC card erases all information inside.
Memo :
● Restoring cannot be performed in the following cases.
● Camera recorder is recording in progress.
● SDHC card is not inserted.
● Write-protect switch of the SDHC card is set (
is
displayed).
● Restoring is not required.
䡵 Recorded Clips
Clips Recorded to SDHC Cards
䡵 Folders in the SDHC Card
Images captured are recorded to [PRIVATE] B [JVC] folder
inside the SDHC card.
Images recorded are sorted into the respective folders
according to the menu settings below.
[System Definition]
Setting
[File Format]
Setting
Folders in the
SDHC Card
HD (MPEG2)
MOV
CQAV
HD (MPEG2)
MP4
BPAV
SD (DV)
MOV
CQDV
SD (DV)
AVI
CADV
This camera recorder uses FAT32 File System.
As such, recorded materials may be split into several files
due to the file size. However, they can be played back
continuously on the camera recorder. Clips may be recorded
across the two SDHC cards in card slots A and B depending
on the recording time of the clip.
When copying clips to a HDD using a PC, it is recommended
to use [JVC Clip Manager Software], which is found in the
bundled CD-ROM, to maintain continuity.
Note :
● A clip recorded across several cards cannot be played
back continuously. Continuous playback is only possible
when the recording is made on one card.
Memo :
● By formatting (initializing) the SDHC card from the
[Format Media] menu on the camera recorder, folders
required for recording in the current [System Definition]
settings and [File Format] settings will be generated.
● When the [System Definition] settings and [File Format]
settings are changed, folders required for recording in those
settings will be automatically generated.
Note :
● When a clip inside the folder is moved or deleted using the
Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac), recording to the
SDHC card may fail if formatting (initializing) of the card is
not performed.
Recording Clips
䡵 Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name
When recording is stopped, the images, audio and
accompanying data which are recorded from start to stop are
recorded as one “clip” on the SDHC card.
An 8-character clip name is automatically generated for the
recorded clip. (Clip Name Prefix + Clip Number)
Example:
ABCG0001
Clip Number
A number in automatic ascending order is
assigned in the recording order.
The clip number can be reset in the menu.
* [Clip Set] B [Reset Clip Number] (A Page 76)
Clip Name Prefix (any 4 alphanumeric characters)
This is set to AxxxGB (AxxxB denotes the last 3 digits of the
serial number) by default.
Memo :
● Before recording starts, you can set any characters for the
clip name prefix by using [Main Menu] B [Record Set]
menu B [Clip Set] B [Clip Name Prefix]. (A Page 76)
● Changes cannot be made after recording.
35
Shooting
Basic Shooting Procedures
[REC] Button
Back Tally Lamp
1
3
Front Tally Lamp
2
5
4
[POWER] Switch
[REC] Button
2 Press the [REC] button to start recording to the SDHC
Preparations
card.
1 Attach the accessories. (A
Page 21)
2 Supply battery or AC adapter power to the camera
recorder. (A Page 22)
3 Insert an SDHC card. (A
Page 31)
4 Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
Set the [POWER] switch to AONB. The camera recorder
starts up in Camera mode and is ready for shooting.
5 Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
(A Page 28)
Shooting
1 Configure the video and audio input settings.
You have to configure video settings such as brightness
adjustment (iris, gain, shutter) and white balance adjustment
in order to start shooting. You also have to adjust the audio
input settings and audio recording level for audio recording.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Adjusting the Iris (A Page 39)
Setting Gain (A Page 40)
Setting the Electronic Shutter (A Page 40)
Adjusting the White Balance (A Page 42)
Adjusting the White Shading (A Page 44)
Setting the ND Filter (A Page 45)
Adjusting Audio Input Settings and Recording Level
(A Page 46)
36
● There are two [REC] buttons on the camera recorder and
one on the lens. Any of the [REC] buttons can be used to
start/stop recording by default.
● During recording, the front and back tally lamps light up in
red.
Memo :
● Tally lamps can be turned off with [Front Tally]/
[Back Tally] in the [Others] menu. (A Page 94)
● To separately control this camera recorder and other
equipment connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal, you can
configure the setting at [1394 Rec Trigger] in the [Others]
menu. (A Page 94)
3 Check the most recently captured images (Clip Review).
Press the [RET] button on the lens to activate the Clip
Review function (A Page 56). The most recently captured
images are played back on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screens. After playback, the camera recorder returns to
standby mode (STBY).
* When [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] B
[LENS RET] is set to AClip ReviewB (A Page 79)
Focus Assist Function
When the [FOCUS ASSIST] button is pressed during
shooting, the focused area is displayed in color (blue, red, or
green). This enables easy and accurate focusing. Select the
color in the menu.
[FOCUS ASSIST] Button
Memo :
● When [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] menu B [Shooting Assist] B
[Focus Assist] is set to AACCU-FocusB, the depth of field
becomes shallower to enable easier focusing. (A Page 89)
● The AACCU-FocusB function switches automatically to AOffB
after about 10 seconds.
● Select the display color in [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B
[Shooting Assist] B [Color]. (A Page 89)
● The [VF PEAKING] knob and [LCD PEAKING +/-] button do
not function when Focus Assist is activated.
䡵 Assigning Focus Assist function to the [RET]
button on the lens
You can assign the Focus Assist function to the [RET] button
on the lens.
* Set [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] B
[LENS RET] to AFocus AssistB. (A Page 79)
37
Shooting
Selecting System
Definition, File Format and
Video Format
You can select the system definition (HD or SD), file format
for recording/playback and the record format for video
images on this camera recorder.
Memo :
䡵 List of Formats
The following is a list of file formats and video formats that
can be selected on this camera recorder.
䡵 When [System Definition] is set to AHD (MPEG2)B
Record Format
File Format
QuickTime
Camera Resolution
Horizontal×Line
1280x720
Frame & Bit Rate
60p (HQ)
60p (SP)
● Make a selection in [Main Menu] B [Record Format] menu.
Remarks
HDV
compatible
30p (HQ)
30p (SP)
Selecting a System Definition
Select the system definition in [System Definition].
There are two different definitions for selection.
HD (MPEG2) : Records in HD (High Definition) quality
SD (DV)
: Records in SD (Standard Definition) quality
24p (HQ)
24p (SP)
HDV
compatible
50p (HQ)
50p (SP)
Selecting a File Format
HDV
compatible
25p (HQ)
Select a file format in [File Format].
There are three file formats for selection.
QuickTime
: QuickTime file format (.MOV)
MP4
: MP4 file format
AVI
: Standard video file format for Windows
systems
25p (SP)
1440x1080
HDV
compatible
60i (HQ)
60i (SP)
HDV
compatible
50i (HQ)
Memo :
● The available options vary as follows depending on the
[System Definition] setting.
● AHD (MPEG2)B : QuickTime, MP4
● ASD (DV)B
: QuickTime, AVI
Selecting a Video Format
HDV
compatible
1920x1080
MP4
1280x720
Select a [Record Format] from the list of formats. The
selectable [Frame & Bit Rate] changes according to the
settings of [System Definition], [File Format], and
[Camera Resolution].
The recording bit rate is 35 Mbps VBR when AHQB is
selected, and 18.3 Mbps (1080i is 25 Mbps) CBR when ASPB
is selected.
50i (SP)
HDV
compatible
60i (HQ)
Full HD
30p (HQ)
Full HD
50i (HQ)
Full HD
25p (HQ)
Full HD
24p (HQ)
Full HD
60p (HQ)
60p (SP)
HDV
compatible
30p (HQ)
30p (SP)
HDV
compatible
24p (HQ)
24p (SP)
HDV
compatible
50p (HQ)
50p (SP)
HDV
compatible
25p (HQ)
1440x1080
1920x1080
38
25p (SP)
HDV
compatible
60i (SP)
HDV
compatible
50i (SP)
HDV
compatible
60i (HQ)
Full HD
30p (HQ)
Full HD
50i (HQ)
Full HD
25p (HQ)
Full HD
24p (HQ)
Full HD
䡵 When [System Definition] is set to ASD (DV)B
When [System Definition] is set to ASD (DV)B, the video
format is fixed as follows for the different models.
Adjusting the Iris
Record Format
File Format
QuickTime/
AVI
Camera Resolution
Horizontal×Line
Frame & Bit Rate
Remarks
720 x 480(U model) 60i
DV
compatible
720 x 576(E model) 50i
DV
compatible
You can adjust the aperture of the lens iris manually or
automatically according to the brightness of the object.
Iris Ring
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos
IRIS
AM
T
RET
W
Select an aspect ratio for the images.
The available options vary as follows depending on the
[System Definition] setting.
● AHD (MPEG2)B:Fixed at 16:9
● ASD (DV)B
: 16:9, 4:3
[IRIS] Switch
Setting the Record Format Menu
1 Display the [Main Menu] B [Record Format] menu.
2 Set each of the items.
3 After setting is complete for all items, select [SET] at
the bottom of the screen, and press the Set button (R).
● The record format is switched.
● A APlease WaitB message appears on the screen during
switching.
Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode
Set the [IRIS] switch on the lens to AMB to enter Manual Iris
mode.
Turn the iris ring on the lens to adjust the iris manually.
Memo :
● Even during Manual Iris mode, the camera recorder
enters forced Auto Iris mode while the [IRIS AUTO] button
is pressed.
3
Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode
Note :
● [System Definition] is fixed at ASD (DV)B in the AUX mode.
Only [File Format] and [Aspect Ratio] can be set. (U model)
Set the [IRIS] switch on the lens to AAB to enter Auto Iris
mode. The iris is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
Memo :
● Even when the [IRIS] switch of the lens is set to AMB, it
switches automatically to Auto Iris mode when the [FULL
AUTO] switch is set to AONB.
● When [Iris Control] in the [Camera Function] B
[FULL AUTO] menu is set to AOffB, you can adjust the iris
manually even if the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder is set to AONB. (A Page 81)
● You can use the cross-shaped button (H I) on this camera
recorder to set the target level (brighter/darker) of the auto
iris. You can also use the menu to set the tracking
sensitivity of the auto iris. (A Page 78)
39
Shooting
Setting Gain
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
This function electrically boosts the light sensitivity when
there is insufficient illumination on the object. You can set the
gain of the video amplifier according to the brightness of the
object. Select the setting mode according to your shooting
conditions.
You can change the shutter speed (time for each shooting
frame) using the electronic shutter function. Electronic
shutter can be adjusted manually or automatically.
Fixed Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)
[GAIN] Selection
Switch
Use the Set button (R) to switch between the shutter modes
and the cross-shaped button (JK) to switch between the
speeds.
[FULL AUTO]
Switch
[FULL AUTO] Switch
Set Button (R)
Fixed Gain Mode (Manual Gain Switching)
Cross-Shaped Button
(JK)
You can select the gain of the video amplifier using the
[GAIN] switch on the camera recorder.
The default positions of the switch are as follows.
[L] : 0 dB (No electrical boosting.)
[M] : 9 dB (Boosts sensitivity by about 2.8 times. )
[H] : 18 dB (Boosts sensitivity by about 8 times. )
Memo :
● The gain value of each position can be set to AALCB and
within the range of A0dBB to A18dBB (in increments of 3 dB)
in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity causes the screen to
appear grainier. (A Page 79)
Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain
Adjustment)
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder to AONB
to enter Automatic gain Level Control (AALCB fixed). The
gain of the video amplifier is automatically set according to
the brightness of the object.
In this case, the [GAIN] switch on the camera recorder is
disabled.
Memo :
● When [Gain] in the [Camera Function] B [FULL AUTO]
menu is set to ASW SetB, you can switch the gain with the
[GAIN] switch even if the [FULL AUTO] switch on the
camera recorder is set to AONB. (A Page 81)
40
䡵 Switching Shutter Mode
Press the Set button (center of the cross-shaped button) to
turn ON/OFF the shutter.
Memo :
● When the shutter is ON, AStepB, AVariableB, or AEEIB
(Extended Electric Iris, i.e. Automatic Shutter mode) may
be selected using [Shutter] in the [Camera Function]
menu. AStepB is the factory default. (A Page 78)
䡵 Switching Shutter Speed
When shutter is ON, use the cross-shaped button (JK) to set
the shutter speed. Shutter speed differs according to the
video format and variable frame rate settings.
Shutter
720/60p
720/30p
1080/60i
1080/30p
480/60i
720/50p
720/25p
1080/50i
1080/25p
576/50i
J Button
Frame Rate
(Standard)
K Button
J Button
720/24p
1080/24p
1/10000
1/10000
1/4000
1/4000
1/4000
1/2000
1/2000
1/2000
1/1000
(Lower limit)
(Standard)
1/4000
1/4000
1/2000
1/2000
1/1000
1/1000
1/500
1/500
1/250
1/250
1/120
1/120
1/50
1/50
1/40
1/1000
1/500
1/25
1/20
1/500
1/250
1/12.5
1/10
1/250
1/250
1/100
K Button
1/100
1/120
1/60
J Button
1/60
1/50
1/48
1/30
1/25
1/24
1/15
1/12.5
1/12
1/7.5
1/6.25
1/6
1/10489.5
1/60.00
1/50.00
1/30.03
1/25.04
1/6.25
~
Variable
K Button
1/5
1/10489.5
(Upper limit)
(Lower limit)
1/50.00
1/40.00
Memo :
1/48.00
~
K Button
Step
1/10000
1/500
~
(Standard)
40, 20, 10
1/1000
(Upper limit)
Variable
50, 25, 12.5
1/10000
1/10000
Step
720/25p
J Button
䡵 During modes other than Variable Frame Rec
Camera
Resolution/
Frame & Bit
Rate
Shutter
Camera
Resolution/
Frame & Bit
Rate
1/24.01
● Shutter speed is usually displayed in seconds (SEC).
However, only when [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to A24p
(SP)B, A24p (HQ)B, A25p (SP)B, or A25p (HQ)B, the speed
can be displayed in angle (DEG).
(A Page 75 [Frame & Bit Rate])
(A Page 91 [Shutter Disp.])
䡵 During Variable Frame Rec
Shutter
Camera
Resolution/
Frame & Bit
Rate
720/30p
720/24p
Frame Rate
60, 30, 15 48, 24, 12 40, 20, 10
J Button
1/10000
1/10000
Step
(Standard)
K Button
J Button
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/500
1/250
1/100
1/250
1/100
1/60
1/100
1/60
1/48
1/60
1/48
1/40
1/30
1/24
1/20
1/15
1/12
1/10
1/7.5
1/6
1/5
1/10489.5
(Upper limit)
~
Variable
K Button
1/4000
(Lower limit)
1/60.00
1/48.00
Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic Shutter
Adjustment)
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder to AONB
to enter the automatic shutter adjustment mode. The shutter
speed is automatically adjusted according to the brightness
of the object.
Switching of shutter speed with the cross-shaped
button (JK) and switching of shutter mode with the Set
button (R) are disabled.
Memo :
● When [Shutter] in the [Camera Function] B [FULL AUTO]
menu is set to ASW SetB, you can switch the shutter mode
with the Set button (R) and shutter speed with the crossshaped button (JK) even if the [FULL AUTO] switch on
the camera recorder is set to AONB. (A Page 81)
● When [Shutter] in the [Camera Function] B [FULL AUTO]
menu is set to AEEIB, the camera recorder enters
Automatic Shutter Adjustment mode. Switching of shutter
mode with the Set button (R) and shutter speed with
cross-shaped button (JK) is disabled. (A Page 81)
1/40.00
41
Shooting
Adjusting the White
Balance
Adjust the white balance according to the color temperature
of the lighting. You can select the adjustment mode
according to the shooting conditions.
As the color of the light (color temperature) varies according to
the light source, it is necessary to readjust the white balance
when the main light source illuminating the object changes.
[WHT.BAL.] Selection Switch
[FULL AUTO]
Switch
䡵 Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode (B)
Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or Memory B.
When the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch is set to [A] or [B],
press the [AWB] button to execute white balance. The white
balance will be automatically adjusted and the adjusted
value will be saved in Memory A or Memory B.
1 Prepare the camera recorder.
A Set the [POWER] switch to AONB.
B Set the iris mode switch of the lens to AAB (automatic).
C Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to AOFFB.
2 Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the lighting
(A Page 45).
3 Set the [WHT.BAL.] switch to AAB or ABB.
4 Locate a place with similar lighting conditions as the
object to be shot, place a white object near the center of
the screen and zoom in to fill the screen with white.
5 Press the [AWB] (Auto White Balance) button.
[POWER]
Switch
[AWB] Button
Manual White Balance Mode (Manual
Switching)
● The white detection frame appears when Auto White
Balance is activated. Fill the frame with white completely.
● AAUTO WHITE A, B OPERATIONB appears on the
viewfinder when Auto White Balance is activated.
● When the correct white balance is achieved,
AAUTO WHITE A, B OKB appears for about 3 seconds
together with the approximate color temperature.
You can select the white balance with the [WHT.BAL.]
selection switch.
Use the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch to select APRESETB
(preset mode), AAB (memory A mode), or ABB (memory B
mode).
AUTO WHITE A
OPERATION
White Detection Frame
Memo :
● The [FAW] (Fulltime Auto White balance) function can be
assigned to the [A], [B], or [PRESET] button using
[Switch Set] in the [Camera Function] menu. (A Page 79)
● In [FAW] mode, color temperature of the images is
sampled and white balance is automatically adjusted to
the appropriate level.
● When [White Balance] in the [Camera Function] B
[FULL AUTO] menu is set to AFAWB and the [FULL AUTO]
switch on the camera recorder is set to AONB, the mode is
fixed at AFAWB.
[AWB] Activating
AUTO WHITE A
OK <3200K>
Result Display
䡵 Preset Mode (PRESET)
Two different color temperature settings are registered on
this camera recorder. You can switch between them using
the [AWB] button.
(Default setting: A3200KB1A5600KB)
You can change both the color temperature settings in the
Preset mode in the menu.
[Main Menu] B [Camera Process] B [White Balance] menu B
Select either [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative Temp.].
(A Page 85)
1 Set the [W. BAL] switch to APRESETB.
2 Press the [AWB] button.
Press the [AWB] button to switch to a different color
temperature. (APreset Temp.B1AAlternative Temp.B)
42
Note :
● Do not use highly reflective objects, such as metals. Doing
so may result in improper white balance adjustment.
● The Auto White function cannot provide optimum white
balance with an object outside the adjustment range, for
example when it contains only a single color or not enough
white color.
䡵 Error Message
If the white balance adjustment is not correctly completed,
one of the following messages will appear for about 5
seconds.
Error Message
Status
NG : OBJECT
The object used is defective.
Displayed when there is not enough
white color on the object, or when the
color temperature is not suitable.
Use another white object and adjust
the white balance again.
ERROR : LOW LIGHT
Insufficient illumination.
Displayed when the lighting is dark.
Increase the lighting and adjust the
white balance again.
ERROR : OVER LIGHT
Excessive illumination.
Displayed when the lighting is too
bright. Decrease the lighting and adjust
the white balance again.
䡵 White Paint Adjustment
You can fine-tune the white balance saved in Memory A or
Memory B.
* Adjust [White Paint R]/[White Paint B] in [Main Menu] B
[Camera Process] B [White Balance] menu (A Page 85)
When [AWB] is selected, the normal white paint adjustment
value is cleared. However, you can also set to keep the value
even when [AWB] is executed. (A Page 85)
Automatic White Balance Mode
(FAW: Fulltime Auto White balance)
You can assign AFAWB (Fulltime Auto White balance) to any
of the three positions on the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch.
Configure the setting with [FAW] in the [Camera Function] B
[SW Set] menu. (A Page 79)
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder to AONB
to enter FAW mode. White balance is automatically adjusted
according to the color temperature of the lighting on the
object.
White balance switching with the [WHT.BAL.] selection
switch is disabled.
Memo :
● When [White Balance] in the [Camera Function] B
[FULL AUTO] menu is set to ASW SetB, you can switch
the white balance with the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch on
the camera recorder. (A Page 81)
Note :
● The accuracy of [FAW] is inferior to that of Auto White
Balance.
● When the power of the camera recorder is turned on with
the [FAW] mode selected, it takes about 15 seconds for
the colors to stabilize.
43
Shooting
Adjusting the White
Shading
You need to adjust white shading when you change the lens.
Even if white balance is adjusted in the center of the screen,
the top and bottom of the screen may not be adjusted.
In this case, green and yellow colors may appear on the
screen. This is due to the characteristic of the lens.
Correcting this phenomena is known as white shading
adjustment.
Perform this adjustment after adjusting the white balance.
[MENU] Button
C Select the item to change with the cross-shaped
button (JK) and press the Set button (R).
D Change the setting value with the cross-shaped
button (JK) while looking at the evaluated value at the
bottom right of the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen.
● If the evaluated value of the adjusting channel is larger
than 0, use the cross-shaped button (K) to change the
setting value so that the value is more or less AEvenB.
Similarly, if the value is smaller than 0, use the crossshaped button (J) to change the setting value.
(A Page 44 [Evaluated value:])
[R]
Red adjustment
[G]
Green adjustment
[B]
Blue adjustment
(Adjustment range : Min (-128) to Normal to Max (127))
Cross-Shaped
Button (JK)
Set Button (R)
Memo :
● There may be some delay in the changes of the evaluated
value after pressing the cross-shaped button (JK).
● Increasing the setting value suppresses the colors at the
bottom and enhances the colors on top.
E Press the Set button (R) to save the settings after the
changes are complete.
F Select [Back] and press the Set button (R) to return to
the [White Balance] menu.
Top
CD
1 Fill the monitor screen with a pattern box of uniform light
F
source or white (plain) paper shone with uniform lighting.
2 Set the control of the camera lens as follows.
Btm
A Set the aperture to F4 or more such that the iris
achieves optimum brightness.
If the brightness is insufficient even at F4, set to the
optimum brightness by increasing the lighting.
B When using a zoom lens, set to the center of the zoom
adjustment range.
3 Adjust the white balance of the camera recorder.
(A Page 42 [Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode (B)])
4 Set the chroma level of the monitor to the maximum.
5 Check the monitor screen.
● There is no need for adjustment if there is no color at the top
and bottom of the screen.
● If the top of the screen is greenish and the bottom is reddish
or vice versa, continue this adjustment.
6 Adjust the white shading.
It is recommended to adjust only G (green).
A Set [Main Menu] B [Camera Process] B [White Balance] B
[Shading Mode] to AManualB. (A Page 85)
B Select [Adjust] in the [White Balance] menu and press
the Set button (R).
44
Evaluated
Value
Evaluated Value Detection Frames
7 Press the [MENU] button to return to the normal
screen.
8 Readjust the white balance. (A
Page 42)
Note :
● If the lens setup is incorrect, you may over-correct the white
shading. Set to the recommended settings for the lens. (Do
not open the iris more than F4. Do not adjust the zoom lens
at the telephoto or wide angle end.)
● White shading occurs as a result of the optical characteristic
of the attached lens. This is not a camera malfunction.
Evaluated value:
A value that compares the average values of the R, G, B
channels in the evaluated value detection frames at the top
(Top) and bottom (Btm) of the LCD monitor or viewfinder
(difference between [Top] and [Btm]).
If [Top] is larger than [Btm], a negative value is displayed. If
[Top] is smaller than [Btm], a positive value is displayed.
When there is no difference between [Top] and [Btm],
AEvenB is displayed. Set such that the evaluated value is
more or less AEvenB.
Setting the ND Filter
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the appropriate
range.
Switch according to the brightness of the object. When the
switch is changed, the position of the switched ND filter is
displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.
(STATUS 1 Screen)
[ND FILTER]
Switch
1280x720 30/24 fps
24p HQ
00:00:00:00
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
282min
Displays the position of the ND filter
[1/16]
Reduces the amount of incident light to 1/16. Select
this for extremely bright outdoor environments.
[1/4]
Reduces the amount of incident light to 1/4. Select
this for bright and sunny outdoor environments.
[OFF]
Select this for indoor and dark outdoor environments.
Memo :
● The display of the ND filter position is set to AOffB by
default. To display the position of the ND filter, set [Filter]
in the [LCD/VF] B [Status Display] menu to AOnB.
(A Page 90)
● It is recommended to use the ND filter to set the lens
aperture to less than F5.6.
45
Shooting
Adjusting Audio Input
Settings and Recording
Level
Adjusting Audio Recording Level
You can select to adjust the audio recording levels for the two
channels (CH-1/CH-2) manually or automatically.
You can record audio from the two channels (CH-1/CH-2) in
synchronization with video images on this camera recorder.
The camera recorder is equipped with [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]
terminals for audio input. You can select a recording channel
and the adjustment mode (manual/automatic).
[AUDIO LEVEL
CH-1/CH-2]
Adjustment Knob
[CH-2 INPUT] Selection Switch
[FULL AUTO] Switch
When the LCD monitor is open
[AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2]
Selection Switch
[AUDIO INPUT 1/2]
Mode Switch
[INPUT1/INPUT2] Terminal
Setting Audio Input
Select the audio to input through [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]
terminals with the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] mode switch.
[LINE]
Use this setting when connecting to an audio device or
other equipment. The reference input level is +4 dBu.
[MIC]
Use this setting when connecting to a dynamic
microphone.
[MIC+48V]
Use this setting when connecting to a microphone
(phantom microphone) that requires a +48 V power
supply.
Note :
● When connecting a device that does not require a +48 V
power supply, make sure that it is not set to the
AMIC+48VB position.
● When the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] mode switch is set to
AMICB, make sure that a microphone is connected to the
[INPUT1/INPUT2] terminal. If you increase the recording
level when a microphone is not connected, noise from the
input terminal may be recorded.
● When a microphone is not connected to the [INPUT1/INPUT2]
terminal, set the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] mode switch to ALINEB or
adjust the volume with the [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2]
recording level adjustment knob.
䡵 Manual Adjustment Mode
(Manual Adjustment)
Set the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch on the camera
recorder to AMANUALB to enter the manual adjustment
mode, and use the [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2] adjustment
knob to set the recording level.
You can adjust the level manually during the recording,
recording pause, and stop modes.
1 Set the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch to
AMANUALB for the channel to manually adjust the
recording level.
2 Turn the corresponding [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2]
adjustment knob to adjust the level.
Adjust such that the audio level meter does not light up at -2 dB
even for loud sounds.
1280x720 30/24 fps
24p HQ
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
282min
F5.6
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
STATUS 1 Screen
Audio Level Meter
Memo :
● Set the reference input level of AMICB and AMIC+48VB
using [Input1 Mic Ref.]/[Input2 Mic Ref.] in the
[Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Audio Set] menu.
(A Page 77)
䡵 Setting of [CH-2 INPUT] Selection Switch
Use the [CH-2 INPUT] selection switch to select the audio to
be recorded to CH-2.
[INPUT1]
Records audio from [INPUT1] terminal to CH-2.
[INPUT2]
Records audio from [INPUT2] terminal to CH-2.
46
00:00:00:00
-2 dB
Memo :
● Set [Audio Limiter] in the [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B
[Audio Set] menu to AOnB to activate the audio limiter in
the Manual Adjustment mode. This controls the recording
level when excessive audio signals are input.
(A Page 77)
● For the reference level to be recorded on SDHC cards, set
[Audio Ref. Level] in the [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B
[Audio Set] menu to A-20dBB or A-12dBB. (common for
CH-1, CH-2) (A Page 77)
Note :
䡵 Using Stereo Type Earphone Jack
● When the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder is
set to AONB, the recording level cannot be adjusted with
the [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2] adjustment knob.
When a stereo type earphone jack is connected, perform the
following setting to output stereo sound.
1 Set the [MONITOR SELECT] switch to ABOTHB.
䡵 Automatic Adjustment Mode
2 Set [Main Menu] B [A/V Out] B [Audio Monitor] to
Set the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch on the camera
recorder to AAUTOB or the [FULL AUTO] switch to AONB to
enter Automatic Adjustment mode. The audio recording level
is set automatically according to the input level.
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to AONB, mode
switching with the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch is
disabled.
AStereoB. (A Page 93)
Memo :
Only audio from [CH-1] is output through the monitor
speaker.
Memo :
● You can set the volume of the alarm tone with
[Alarm Level] in the [Main Menu] B [Others] menu.
(AOffB/ALowB/AMiddleB/AHighB) (A Page 93)
● When [Audio] in the [Camera Function] B [FULL AUTO]
menu is set to ASW SetB, you can switch the recording
level mode with the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch
on the camera recorder even if the [FULL AUTO] switch is
set to AONB. (A Page 81)
Audio Monitor During Recording
You can check the input audio with the monitor speaker or
earphones.
1 Select the channel to monitor with the
[MONITOR SELECT] switch.
[CH-1]
Outputs audio from [INPUT1] terminal.
[BOTH]
Mixes and outputs audio from both [INPUT1/INPUT2]
terminals.
[CH-2]
Outputs audio from [INPUT2] terminal.
2 Adjust the volume of the monitor audio with the
[MONITOR] adjustment knob.
Monitor
Speaker
[PHONES]
Terminal
[MONITOR]
Adjustment Knob
[MONITOR SELECT]
Switch
Memo :
● Alarm tone is output when there is an abnormality in the
camera recorder. Alarm tone is also output when the
SDHC card is full or when the battery is low.
(A Page 135)
● Alarm tone is not output during recording.
Note :
● Increasing the volume of the monitor too much may result
in howling of the camera microphone.
47
Shooting
Time Code and User’s Bit
Time code and user’s bit data are recorded with the video in
this camera recorder.
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the viewfinder
and LCD screens during playback or recording.
(Status screen)
Memo :
● When [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to
AInternalB, the built-in time code generator number is
displayed.
● When [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to
AExternalB, the value of the external time code generator
input to the [TC IN] terminal is displayed.
● Time code display for [IEEE1394] input is not supported.
● Values recorded on the SDHC card is displayed in Media
mode.
Setting
Display
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit
TC
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the viewfinder
and LCD screens during playback or recording.
The display differs according to the menu settings.
Time
Code
UB
1 Set [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Status Display] B
[TC/UB] to AOnB. (A Page 91)
Time code or user’s bit data is displayed on the status
screen.
00:00:00:00
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
282min
F5.6
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
STATUS 1 Screen
2 Select the display with the [TC DISPLAY] switch on
When [Analog
Out Char.] or
[SDI Out Char.] in
the [A/V Out]
menu is set to
AOnB, time code
or user’s bit is
displayed in the
respective video
䡵 STATUS 1 screen in
output images
Camera mode
during the
䡵 STATUS 1, STATUS 2
screens in Media mode (SD) LCD/VF display
setting on the left.
Time Code Operation Mode
Three types of time code operation can be selected with the
[TC GENE.] switch. They are AFREEB, ARECB, and
AREGENB.
* The [TC GENE.] selection switch is enabled when
[TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to AInternalB.
Setting
Mode
Description
FREE
FreeRun The time code operates in the run mode at all
mode
times regardless of the recording status.
It continues to run even when the power of the
camera recorder is turned off. *
REC
RecRun
mode
the LCD monitor.
Select time code display (TC) or user’s bit display (UB).
REGEN Regen
mode
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. It continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SDHC card is not
replaced. If the SDHC card is removed and
recording is made on another card, time code
will be recorded on the new card from where it
was left off in the previous card.
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. When the SDHC card is replaced,
the last time code recorded on the card is read
and recorded on a new card so that the time
code continues in running order. (A Page 52)
* When [Rec Mode] in the [Record Set] menu is set to
AVariable FrameB, time code operation enters RecRun
mode.
[TC DISPLAY]
Setting Switch
[TC GENE.] Setting Switch
48
VIDEO Output
Display
When [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Status
User’s Bit Display] B [TC/UB] is set to
AOnB, time code or user’s
bit is displayed during the
following status display and
information display mode of
the LCD screen.
Time Code or User’s Bit
1280x720 30/24 fps
24p HQ
LCD/VF Display
Using the Internal Time
Code Generator
Presetting the Time Code
Time code and user’s bit data generated from the internal
time code generator are recorded.
This section describes how to set [TC Preset] in the [TC/UB]
menu. (A Page 88)
Memo :
Drop frame/non-drop frame mode
● When the frame rate setting in [Main Menu] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [Frame & Bit Rate] is
60 (30), the actual number of frames per second is
approximately 59.94 (29.97). However, the time code
processing standard is 60 (30) frames. To make up for the
frame number discrepancy, the drop frame mode (Drop)
drops the 00 frame and 01 frame every minute except for
minutes that are multiples of 10.
● On the other hand, the non-drop frame mode (Non Drop)
does not drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with
the actual time.
[USER2] Button
[TC GENE.] Setting Switch
Memo :
● When the frame rate setting in [Main Menu] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [Frame & Bit Rate] is
A50, 25, 24B, settings cannot be made in [Drop].
(A Page 75)
● You can configure the setting without accessing the [TC/UB]
menu screen. (A Page 51)
䡵 Required Settings Before Preset
1 Set [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TCG Source] to
AInternalB. (A Page 88)
2 Set the [TC GENE.] switch to ARECB or AFREEB.
[REC]
Preset data in the time code generator operates in
run mode during recording mode. Set this when
recording continuous time code in connecting
frames.
[FREE]
Time code starts to operate in run mode from the
preset time in the time code generator.
3 Select the framing mode for the time code generator
(only when the frame rate setting is A60B or A30B).
Set using [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [Drop].
(A Page 88)
[Drop]
Sets the run mode of the time code generator to drop
frame mode.
Use this setting when placing emphasis on the
recording time.
[Non
Drop]
Sets the run mode of the time code generator to nondrop frame mode.
Use this setting when placing emphasis on the
number of frames.
49
Shooting
Using the Internal Time
Code Generator
(continued)
Presetting the Time Code (continued)
䡵 Setting Time Code
Memo :
● Press the [USER2] button to reset each digit to A0B. The
cursor moves to the time digit (left).
3 Check the values and press the Set button (R).
● The time code is set and the screen returns to [TC/UB].
● To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL] button.
4 Press the [MENU] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
[USER2] Button
Presetting the User’s Bit
You can add an 8-digit hexadecimal number as the user’s bit
to the recorded image.
[MENU] Button
Set Button (R)
[USER2] Button
Crossshaped
button
(JKH I)
[MENU] Button
Set Button (R)
[CANCEL] Button
1 Select [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TC Preset] and press
Crossshaped
button
(JKH I)
the Set button (R). (A Page 88)
The [TC Preset] screen appears.
[CANCEL] Button
1
1 Set [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TCG Source] to
AInternalB. (A Page 88)
2 Select [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [UB Preset] and
press the Set button (R). (A Page 88)
The [UB Preset] setting screen appears.
[TC/UB] Menu Screen
Memo :
1
● When the [TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB, the
parameter is displayed as ARegenerationB and cannot be
selected.
● When [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TCG Source] is set to
AExternalB, the parameter is displayed as AExternalB and
cannot be selected.
2 Set the time code (hour, minute, second, frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (H I) to place the cursor at the
item to set, then the cross-shaped button (JK) to change the
values.
Cursor
During non-drop frame
[TC Preset] Screen
(During drop frame)
50
[TC/UB] Menu Screen
Memo :
● When the [TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB, the
parameter is displayed as ARegenerationB and cannot be
selected.
● When [Main Menu] B[TC/UB] B [TCG Source] is set to
AExternalB, the parameter is displayed as AExternalB and
cannot be selected.
3 Use the cross-shaped button (H I) to place the cursor
at the item to set, then use the cross-shaped button (JK)
to change the values.
Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets between A and F
can be specified for the user’s bit.
䡵 Setting Time Code
1 Hold down the [MENU] button and press the [USER1]
button.
The [TC Preset] setting screen appears.
Cursor
Cursor
[TC Preset] Screen
(During drop frame)
[UB Preset] Screen
Memo :
● Press the [USER2] button to reset each digit to A0B. The
cursor moves to the left.
4 Check the values and press the Set button (R).
● The time code is set and the screen returns to [TC/UB].
● To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL] button.
5 Press the [MENU] button.
2 Set the time code (hour, minute, second, frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (H I) to place the cursor at the
item to set, then the cross-shaped button (JK) to change the
values.
Memo :
● Press the [USER2] button to reset each digit to A0B. The
cursor moves to the time digit (left).
3 Check the values and press the Set button (R).
Returns to the normal screen.
● The time code is set and the screen returns to the normal
screen.
● To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL] button.
Setting Time Code Without Opening the
Menu
[USER1] Button
[USER2] Button
[MENU] Button
Set Button (R)
Note :
● Editing will be canceled and the screen will close under the
following situations.
● The [TC DISPLAY] switch is selected during editing.
● The camera recorder is switched to the Media mode.
● When editing time code, operations of the [USER1],
[USER2], [USER3] buttons that are set in the [Main Menu] B
[Camera Function] B [Switch Set] menu are disabled.
[USER2] functions as the number reset button. (A Page 79)
Crossshaped
button
(JKH I)
[CANCEL] Button
Memo :
● Settings cannot be made in the following cases.
● [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to AExternalB.
● [TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB.
● Menu screen is displayed.
● The camera recorder is not in the Camera mode.
(Except AUX Mode)
䡵 Required Settings Before Preset
(A Page 49)
● Set [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu to AInternalB.
● Set the [TC DISPLAY] switch to ATCB.
● Set the [TC GENE.] switch to settings other than
AREGENB.
51
Shooting
Using the Internal Time
Code Generator (continued)
Setting User’s Bit Without Opening the Menu
Memo :
● Settings cannot be made in the following cases.
● [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to AExternalB.
● [TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB.
● Menu screen is displayed.
● The camera recorder is not in Camera mode. (Except
AUX mode)
Note :
● When editing time code, operations of the [USER1],
[USER2], [USER3] buttons that are set in the
[Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] menu
are disabled. [USER2] functions as the number reset
button. (A Page 79)
Recording Time Code in Continuation of
the Recorded Time Code on SDHC card
This camera recorder is equipped with the time code reader.
䡵 Required Settings Before Preset
(A Page 49)
● Set [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu to AInternalB.
● Set the [TC DISPLAY] switch to AUBB.
● Set the [TC GENE.] switch to settings other than AREGENB.
䡵 Setting User’s Bit
1 Hold down the [MENU] button and press the [USER1]
button.
[TC GENE.] Setting Switch
1 Set [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TCG Source] to
AInternalB. (A Page 88)
2 Set the [TC GENE.] switch on the inner panel of the
LCD to AREGENB.
The [UB Preset] setting screen appears.
Cursor
When the camera recorder enters from recording standby
mode to recording mode, it reads the time code already
recorded on the SDHC card and records the new time code
in continuation of that value.
The same data as the user’s bit already recorded on the
SDHC card is recorded.
Memo :
[UB Preset] Screen
2 Set the user’s bit.
Use the cross-shaped button (H I) to place the cursor at the item
to set, then the cross-shaped button (JK) to change the values.
Memo :
● Press the [USER2] button to reset each digit to A0B. The
cursor moves to the left.
3 Check the values and press the Set button (R).
● The user’s bit is set and the screen returns to the normal
screen.
● To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL] button.
Note :
● Editing will be canceled and the screen will close under
the following situations.
● The [TC DISPLAY] switch is selected during editing.
● The camera recorder is switched to the Media mode.
52
● When the [TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB, the
framing mode of the time code follows the settings in
[Drop] of the [TC/UB] menu instead of the clip settings.
(A Page 88)
Synchronizing Time Code
with External Time Code
Generator
This camera recorder comes with a time code input terminal
([TC IN]).
An external time code generator can be connected to the
[TC IN] terminal to enable synchronization with the SMPTE/
EBU LTC time code.
Memo :
● After synchronization (slave lock) is complete, the built-in
time code generator continues to run even when there is
no input from the external time code generator.
Connection
Settings on the Camera Recorder
䡵 When connecting external time code generator
to a master device
[GENLOCK/AUX] Switch
1 Set to the Camera mode. (A
Page 8)
2 Set the [GENLOCK/AUX] selection switch to
AGENLOCKB. (U model)
3 Set [Genlock Input] in the [Others] menu to ABNCB.
(A Page 93)
[GENLOCK/AUX INPUT] Terminal (U Model)
[GENLOCK INPUT] Terminal (E Model)
4 Set [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu as follows.
Slave Device
● Slave device
● Master device
External Synchronizing Signal
To [TC IN]
terminal of
another camera
SYNC Signal Generator
External Synchronizing Signal
External Time Code
Generator
LTC Time Code
: Set to AExternalB
: Set to AInternalB
5 Set the LCD monitor or viewfinder as follows.
● Viewfinder
: Set to the STATUS 1 screen display
(A Page 108)
● LCD monitor
: Set to the enlarged status display
screen (A Page 110)
The input and synchronizing status of the external time
code generator are displayed as follows.
Master Device
Lights up
1 Input the external synchronizing signal to the external
time code generator and the [GENLOCK/AUX INPUT]
terminal of this camera recorder.
Make use of BB signal or HDTV 3 level synchronizing signal
as the external synchronizing signal.
1280x720 30/24 fps
60p HQ
OK
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
282min
00:00:00:00
DD
20 min
F5.6
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
SKIN AREA
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
Status Screen
Note :
● If the power of the camera recorder is turned ON/OFF
during input of the external synchronizing signal, the
screen may be disrupted for a few seconds. This is not a
malfunction.
2 Input the SMTPE/EBU LTC time code from the
external time code generator to the [TC IN] terminal of
this camera recorder.
䡵 When connecting multiple units of this camera
recorder with one as the master and the rest as
slave devices
Master Device
[Y/VIDEO] Output Terminal
1 Connect the [TC OUT] terminal of the master device to
the [TC IN] terminal of the slave device.
DF
EXT
STBY
A
DD
1280 x 720
min 60p HQ
100min
67.8min
B 123 min OK
Enlarged Status Display Screen
● When the built-in time code generator is synchronized
with the input of the external time code generator, L on
the STATUS 1 screen or enlarged status display screen
will light up.
● If the time code is not synchronized or when there is no
time code input, L does not light up.
Lights up
1280x720 30/24 fps
60p HQ
OK
282min
00:00:00:00
DD
20 min
F5.6
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
SKIN AREA
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
Status Screen
[TC IN] Terminal
CH2
1 Set the external time code generator or master device,
and run the time code.
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
[TC OUT] Terminal
CH1
Camera Recorder Operation
Slave Device
[GENLOCK/AUX INPUT] Terminal
[TCG Source] : AExternalB
Lights up
[TCG Source] : AExternalB
Lights up
CH1
CH2
DF
EXT
STBY
A
DD
1280 x 720
min 60p HQ
100min
67.8min
B 123 min OK
Enlarged Status Display Screen
Memo :
● After synchronization is complete, the built-in time code
generator will continue to run even when the external time
code generator or master device is disconnected.
● The user’s bit becomes the data of the external time code
generator or master device.
2 Connect the [Y/VIDEO] terminal of the master device
to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal of the slave device.
53
Shooting
Setting Zebra Pattern
Memo :
● ATop2B and ABottom2B cannot be set if [Zebra] is set to
A1PatternB.
● When the specified range of two zebra patterns overlaps,
the two zebra patterns overlap and are displayed in a grid.
When the luminance level range for displaying zebra patterns
is specified, diagonal lines (zebra pattern) are displayed at
areas with the specified luminance levels during shooting.
Specify the brightness (luminance) level
range for displaying zebra pattern
3 Display the zebra pattern.
Set the [ZEBRA ON/OFF] switch in front of the camera
recorder to AONB to display the zebra pattern at the specified
range.
Zebra Pattern
[ZEBRA ON/OFF] Switch
Specify the upper (Top1, Top2) and lower (Bottom1,
Bottom2) limits of the luminance level.
1 Set the zebra display pattern.
● Select the display pattern in [LCD/VF] menu B
[Shooting Assist] B [Zebra].
[Zebra1] Display
[Zebra2] Display
2 Specify the brightness (luminance) level range for
displaying zebra pattern.
Specify the upper (Top1, Top2) and lower (Bottom1,
Bottom2) limits of the luminance level in [LCD/VF] menu B
[Shooting Assist] B [Zebra].
Item
Settings
Options
Zebra
Zebra display pattern
1Pattern
2Patterns
Top1
Upper luminance limit for
displaying [Zebra1]
5 % - 100 %, Over
(in 5 % increments)
Bottom1
Lower luminance limit for
displaying [Zebra1]
0 % - 100 %
(in 5 % increments)
Top2
Upper luminance limit for
displaying [Zebra2]
5 % - 100 %, Over
(in 5 % increments)
Bottom2
Lower luminance limit for
displaying [Zebra2]
0 % - 100 %
(in 5 % increments)
54
3 Flip the [SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch of the
Setting Spot Meter
camera recorder.
The operation switches as below when the [SKIN AREA/
SPOT METER] switch is flipped.
The brightness of the object during shooting is displayed.
This function is useful when setting video or stage lighting or
when specifying camera exposure.
A cursor indicating the location and the brightness (%) of that
location are displayed in the images shown on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screens.
● Zebra patterns display the brightness of output video
signals. (A Page 54)
● This function allows you to check the brightness of input
images from the lens without depending on image
processing such as gamma curve. The dynamic range of
the camera recorder is 300 % and a brightness range of
0 % to 300 % and above is displayed.
䡵 When [Max&Min]/[Max]/[Min] is selected
A [SPOT METER ON] is displayed when the switch is
flipped. Cursors appear according to the settings. The
positions of the brightest (Max) and darkest (Min) areas
in the screen are automatically detected with regard to
the changes of the object, and the brightness of these
areas is displayed.
Cursor
([Max] : Green)
Cursor
([Min] : Yellow)
Memo :
● Spot meter may not be consistent with the zebra display
range. When [Gamma] in the [Camera Process] menu is
set to ACinemaB or AFilm OutB, the 100IRE output is not
consistent with the 100 % display. (A Page 83)
When an object of more than 300 % luminance is
detected, it is displayed as 300 %.
B [SPOT METER FIXED] is displayed when the switch is
flipped. Automatic detection stops. Frames are fixed at
the stopped positions and the brightness is displayed.
Set Button (R)
Cursor
([Max] : Green)
Cross-shaped
Button
(JKH I)
Cursor
([Min] : Yellow)
[SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] Switch
1 Select ASpot MeterB in [SKIN A./SPOT M.] of the [Main
Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] menu. (A Page 80)
C [SPOT METER OFF] is displayed when the switch is
flipped. Displays of cursors and brightness disappear.
2 Select one of the following from [SPOT METER]. (A Page 80)
Item
Settings
Color of Frame
Indicating the Position
[Max&Min] Displays the brightness (%)
and positions of the
brightest and darkest areas
in the screen. Frames may
also be stopped at the
current positions.
[Max]
[Min]
: Green
: Yellow
[Max]
Displays the brightness (%)
and position of the brightest
area in the screen. Frames
may also be stopped at the
current positions.
Green
[Min]
Displays the brightness (%)
and position of the darkest
area in the screen. Frame
may also be stopped at the
current positions.
Yellow
[Manual]
Displays the brightness (%)
of the specified position.
Green
(Blinks in red when
specifying the position)
D Returns to the state in A.
55
Shooting
Setting Spot Meter
(continued)
Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)
䡵 When [Manual] is selected
A [SPOT METER FIXED] is displayed when the switch is
flipped. The brightness of the cursor position is displayed.
You can check (review) the last recorded video clip on the
screen.
However, the video clip cannot be played back if the settings
of the camera recorder are different from the video format
(Camera Resolution/Frame & Bit Rate) of the clip.
(A Page 75)
Memo :
Cursor (Green)
● To use this function, assign AClip ReviewB to any of the
[USER1], [USER2], [USER3] buttons or the [RET] button
on the lens.
* [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] B
[LENS RET]/[USER1]/[USER2]/[USER3] B
AClip ReviewB(A Page 79)
B [SPOT METER OFF] is displayed when the switch is
flipped. Displays of cursors and brightness disappear.
[RET] Button
IRIS
AM
T
RET
W
C [SPOT METER SELECT] is displayed when the switch is
flipped. The cursor blinks in red.
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button (JKH I) to
specify the position to display the brightness. When the
position is decided, press the Set button (R) or flip the
switch to confirm.
1 Press the button assigned with the AClip ReviewB
function during standby (ASTBYB is displayed).
Playback of the configured section starts.
Memo :
Cursor
(Blinks in red)
D Returns to the state in A.
Memo :
● When moving the cursor position, [SHUTTER]/
[AE LEVEL] control is disabled.
● You can also decide the position of the cursor with the Set
button (R).
● When the brightness is 0 % in the entire screen, the frame
is fixed in the center.
● If the cursor is outside the A4:3B range, changing the
[Aspect Ratio] item in the [Record Format] menu from
A16:9B to A4:3B restores the cursor to the default position.
(A Page 75)
56
● The video clip is played back according to the [Clip Review]
settings in the [Camera Function] menu. By default setting
(Last 5 sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip is played back.
(A Page 79)
● When playback is complete, the camera recorder exits Clip
Review and returns to ASTBYB (recording standby) mode.
Note :
● During Clip Review, only the [CANCEL] and [REC]
buttons are enabled. Press the [CANCEL] button to
cancel clip review and return to ASTBYB (recording
standby) mode. Press the [REC] button to cancel clip
review and enter recording mode. It will take some time to
start recording after the button is pressed.
● When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the whole clip is
played back.
● Only video clips in the currently selected slot can be
reviewed.
● When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip Review
function is disabled.
● Clip Review is unavailable when Clip Continuous Rec is
paused (STBYC, yellow text). To operate Clip Review,
use the [CANCEL] button to set to ASTBYCB (white text)
first. (A Page 59)
● Clip Review is unavailable when the camera recorder is
connected to an external equipment and the equipment is
in recording state.
Assigning Functions to
User Buttons
You can assign functions to the [USER1], [USER2], and
[USER3] buttons.
By assigning functions to the [USER1], [USER2], and
[USER3] buttons, the usability of the camera recorder is
enhanced.
[USER1], [USER2], [USER3]
Buttons
1 Assign functions to the [USER1], [USER2], and
[USER3] buttons from the menu. (A Page 79)
Set each of the [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3] items in
the [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] menu.
Memo :
● Operations of the [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3]
buttons are interlocked with the menu settings.
● When the menu screen is displayed, these buttons
function as the menu operation buttons.
(A Page 70 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen])
57
Shooting
Protecting Important
Scenes (OK Mark Function)
You can append OK marks to the clips for important scenes.
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be deleted, thus
protecting the important clips. In addition, you can display
only the clips with OK marks in the thumbnail display during
Media mode.
Special Recording
Besides the normal recording mode, three special recording
methods are available in this camera recorder. They are Pre
Rec, Clip Continuous Rec, and Variable Frame Rec.
Select the mode from [Rec Mode] in the [Record Set] menu.
* Set using [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode].
(A Page 76)
Appending OK Marks During Recording
1 Assign the AOK MarkB function to the [RET] button on
the lens from the menu.
● Select [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[Switch Set] B [LENS RET] B AOK MarkB. (A Page 79)
● Append or delete the [OK] mark with every press of the
[RET] button.
● When an OK mark is appended, AOKB appears at the top
left of the status screen on the viewfinder/LCD monitor.
(A Page 104, 111)
AOKB Mark
00:00:00:00
1280x720 30/24 fps
60p HQ
OK
Pre Rec
By setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec Time], you
can start recording video and audio before actual recording
starts based on the Pre Rec Time setting.
When starting actual recording while the camera recorder is
in Recording Standby (STBYP) mode, you can start
recording a few seconds earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time]
setting.
Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete event without
missing the initial scenes even if you start the recording late.
* Pre Rec Time can be set to A5secB, A10secB, or A20secB
in [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Pre Rec Time].
(A Page 76)
Completed Clip
(Recorded video and audio)
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
A 100min
B 100min
REC
282min
F5.6
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
STATUS 1 Screen
Memo :
● Clips appended with [OK Mark] cannot be deleted from
the camera recorder using [Delete Clip]. (However, they
will be deleted when the SDHC card is formatted.)
● When the camera recorder is in Media mode (SD Card
mode), you can delete the [OK] marks appended during
recording, or append/delete [OK] marks after shooting.
(A Page 68 [Appending and Deleting OK Marks])
Note :
● When the write-protect switch on the SDHC card is set
(
is displayed), [OK] marks cannot be appended/
deleted.
Recording starts a
number of seconds
earlier based on
the [Pre Rec Time]
setting
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
1 Set [Rec Mode] to APre RecB. (A
Press [REC]
(Recording stops)
Page 76)
● Set [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] to
APre RecB.
● The status display changes from ASTBYB B ASTBYPB.
2 Press the [REC] button to start recording in Pre Rec
mode.
● The status display changes from ASTBYPB B ARECPB
and the card slot status indicator lights up in red.
● Press the [REC] button again to pause recording. The
display changes from ARECPB B ASTBYPB and the card
slot status indicator lights up in green.
Note :
● When the interval between start and stop recording is
short, ASTBYPB may not be displayed immediately after
recording is complete.
ARECPB B ASTBYPB (STBY blinks in red) B ASTBYPB
is displayed.
● When the SDHC card becomes full during recording,
recording stops and ASTOPPB is displayed.
58
4 Resume recording. (Recording 2)
Note :
● Video and audio before the above mentioned time may not
be recorded after recording starts in the following cases.
● Immediately after power on
● Immediately after recording stops
● Immediately after switching from Media mode to
Camera mode
● Immediately after setting [Rec Mode]
● Immediately after the end of Clip Review
● Immediately after changing file format
● Immediately after changing video format
● Press the [REC] button again to resume recording. The
display changes from ASTBYCB (yellow text) B ARECCB.
● The card slot status indicator remains lighted in red.
5 Pause recording.
● Press the [REC] button again to pause recording. The display
changes from ARECCB B ASTBYCB (yellow text).
● The card slot status indicator remains lighted in red.
6 Resume recording. (Recording 3)
● Press the [REC] button again to resume recording. The
display changes from ASTBYCB (yellow text) B ARECCB.
● The card slot status indicator remains lighted in red.
Clip Continuous Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the image,
audio, and accompanying data from the start till the end of
the recording are recorded as one AclipB on the SDHC card.
This mode allows you to consolidate several rounds of Astartstop recordingB into one clip.
7 Press and hold the [REC] button.
Example : In normal recording, three clips are generated as
Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.
However, recording in this mode generates only
one clip.
8 Press the [REC] button again.
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording pauses)
Recording 1
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording pauses)
Recording 2
Press [REC]
(Recording stops)
Recording 3
Completed Clip
(Recorded video and audio)
Recording 1 Recording 2 Recording 3
1 Set [Rec Mode] to AClip ContinuousB.
● Set [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] to
AClip ContinuousB. (A Page 76)
● The status display changes from ASTBYB B ASTBYCB.
2 Start recording. (Recording 1)
● Press the [REC] button to start recording in Clip Continuous
mode.
● The status display changes from ASTBYCB B ARECCB
and the card slot status indicator lights up in red.
● Recording stops and the display changes from ARECCB B
ASTBYCB. A AclipB is generated.
● The card slot status indicator lights up in green.
● The status display changes from ASTBYCB B ARECCB
and the card slot status indicator lights up in red.
● A new AclipB is generated from here.
Memo :
● The following operations cannot be performed while
recording is paused (STBYC, yellow text).
● Clip Review operation (A Page 56)
● Switching SDHC card slots
● Switching operation mode (A Page 8)
● Files are split into sizes of 4 GB (or 30 minutes)
regardless of the menu settings.
Note :
● Do not remove the SDHC card during recording (RECC,
red text) or recording pause (STBYC, yellow text).
● To remove the SDHC card in AClip ContinuousB mode,
press the [CANCEL] button, check that ASTBYCB (white
text) is displayed and the card slot status indicator is
lighted in green before you remove the card.
● When the SDHC card becomes full during recording,
recording stops and ASTOPCB is displayed.
● When the [POWER] switch is turned off during recording
or recording pause, recording stops and power is cut off
after a clip is generated.
● If the power is cut off due to low battery power, a proper
clip may not be generated.
3 Pause recording.
● Press the [REC] button again to pause recording. The display
changes from ARECCB B ASTBYCB (yellow text).
● The card slot status indicator remains lighted in red.
Memo :
● When the [CANCEL] button is pressed while the camera
recorder is paused (STBYC), the display changes from
ASTBYCB (yellow text) B ASTBYCB (blinking yellow text) B
ASTBYCB (white text). A AclipB is generated. The card slot
status indicator lights up in green.
59
Shooting
Note :
Special Recording
(continued)
Variable Frame Rec
Shooting in this mode allows you to obtain smooth slow
motion or quick motion videos.
Using different frame rate settings for recording and
playback, videos captured at normal speed can be played
back more smoothly than those in low or high speed
playback.
To enable Variable Frame Rec, the following two settings are
required at the same time.
● [Camera Resolution] in the [Record Format] menu is set to
A1280x720B.
● [Frame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Format] menu is set to
A30p (HQ)B, A24p (HQ)B, or A25p (HQ)B.
䡵 Number of Frames that can be Set
1 Set [Camera Resolution] to A1280x720B, then set
[Frame & Bit Rate]. (A Page 76)
Set [Frame & Bit Rate] to A30p (HQ)B, A24p (HQ)B, or A25p
(HQ)B.
2 Set [Rec Mode] to AVariable FrameB. (A
Page 76)
Set [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] to
AVariable FrameB.
3 Select a recording frame rate from [Frame Rate].
(A Page 76)
The selectable frame rates are as shown below.
Record Format
1280x720
10
12
15
20
24
30
40
48
60
^
24p (HQ)
^
10
12
15
20
24
30
40
48
60
25p (HQ)
^
^
10
12.5
20
25
40
50
^
^
Effect during playback
Memo :
Selectable Shooting Frame Rate
30p (HQ)
Quick motion
Standard
Slow motion
● When [AE LEVEL] in the [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[Switch Set] menu is set to AAE LEVEL/VFRB, you can use the
cross-shaped button (H I) to select the frame rate during
Variable Frame Rec. In modes other than Variable Frame Rec,
the cross-shaped button (H I) functions as the [AE LEVEL]
setting button. (A Page 80)
60
● The recording frame rate cannot be changed during
recording. To change the frame rate, stop the recording
first and perform the change.
● When the [TC GENE.] switch located on the inner panel of
the LCD is set to AFREEB, videos are recorded in Rec
(RecRun) time code.
● Audio cannot be recorded. A
mark appears in the audio
level meter display. (A Page 104)
● Depending on the settings, images beyond the recording
stop position may be recorded and it may take time for the
camera recorder to enter ASTBYB mode.
Playback
Playing Back Recorded
Clips
Thumbnail Screen
To play back clips recorded on SDHC cards, switch to the
Media mode (SD Card mode).
Press the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button in Camera mode to
enter SD Card mode. A thumbnail screen of the clips
recorded on the SDHC card is displayed.
You can play back the selected clip on the thumbnail screen.
Memo :
● When an SDHC card without any clips is inserted,
ANo ClipsB is displayed.
The thumbnail screen is available in “No Detailed Properties
(4x3 thumbnails)” and “Detailed Properties (4x1 thumbnails)”
displays.
Use the thumbnail menu [Detailed Properties] to switch
display. (A Page 65)
The first frame of the recorded clip on the SDHC card is
displayed as the thumbnail.
Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording from the
oldest to most recent.
䡵 No Detailed Properties (4x3 Thumbnails)
Screen
D
E
F
C
B
Operation Buttons
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel of the
camera recorder to operate the thumbnail screen.
A
G
C
H
B
D
I
E
J
A
F
Name
A Cursor
Name
Description
A [MENU] Button
Displays the thumbnail screen menu.
Press this button to close the menu
screen during menu display and return
to the normal screen.
B [USER1] Button
Appends (or deletes) an OK mark on
the selected clip.
C [USER2] Button
Deletes the selected clip.
D Set (Play) Button
Sets the values and items. (Confirm)
Plays back the selected clip.
E Cross-Shaped
J
K
H
I
Button (JKH I)
F [CANCEL] (Stop)
Button
:
:
:
:
Moves the cursor upward.
Moves the cursor downward.
Moves back to the previous item.
Moves forward to the next item.
(To enter sub-menus or display
pop-up menus.)
Description
Indicates the selected clip. Use the crossshaped button (JKH I) to move the cursor.
After power is turned on and SDHC card is
inserted, or when the camera recorder is
switched to Media mode (SD Card mode),
the cursor is positioned on top of the latest
clip.
When the camera recorder changes to the
thumbnail screen during playback, the cursor
is positioned on the clip that was played
back. If you play back the same clip again, it
will continue from where it was left off.
The default position of the cursor when
SDHC card slot is switched is on the
previously selected clip before the switch.
䡵 Example of the moving order of the cursor
(total 22 clips)
Scrolls
page
Cancels settings and returns to the
previous screen.
Stops video playback.
61
Playback
Playing Back Recorded
Clips (continued)
Name
D Video
Format
Thumbnail Screen (continued)
䡵 No Detailed Properties (4x3
Thumbnails) Screen (continued)
Description
Displays the video format (Camera
Resolution/Frame Rate) that allows playback
and thumbnail display.
Five types including [1080/60i, 30p, 24p],
[1080/50i, 25p], [720/60p, 30p, 24p],
[720/50p, 25p], [480/60i] (U model) and
[576/50i] (E model). Clips of other video
formats are represented in alternative
display. Clips that are in alternative display
cannot be played back with the current video
format settings.
A
D
E
F
C
B
A
G
H
A A clip with corrupted management
information. It cannot be played back
even if you press the playback button.
I
B A clip that cannot be played back nor
J
Name
B SDHC Card
C File Format
displayed in thumbnail with the current
video format settings. It cannot be played
back even if you press the playback
button. The format of the clip is displayed.
Description
Displays the status of the inserted SDHC
card, selected SDHC card, write-protect
switch, and the need for restoring.
Use the [SLOT SELECT] switch to switch
slots. Clips in slot A and B cannot be
displayed at the same time.
: Write-protect switch of the SDHC card
in slot A is set.
: SDHC card in slot B needs to be
restored or formatted, or is an
unsupported SDHC card.
* Depends on the settings in [Record Set] B
[Record Format] B [System Definition],
[Camera Resolution], and [Frame & Bit Rate]
items of the [Main Menu] screen.
(A Page 75)
E Number of
Clips
F Remaining
Battery
Power
Shows the file format of the currently
displayed clips.
Only clips with the resolution (AHD
(MPEG2)B or ASD (DV)B) selected in [System
Definition] are displayed. (A Page 75)
* Depends on the settings in [Record Set] B
[Record Format] B [File Format] on the
[Main Menu] screen. (A Page 75)
62
B
Displays the [running number/total number of
clips] of the displayed clips.
:
:
:
:
:
Ample battery power.
Slightly reduced battery power.
Low battery power.
Empty battery power. (Blinks in red)
External power supply connected.
Memo :
● If the battery in use is not a recommended
one, the battery mark which indicates the
battery level may not appear.
G Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
When there is a black space below the scroll
bar (white), this indicates further pages.
When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,
this indicates the last page.
Name
H Thumbnail
Text
I Clip Mark
Description
Displays the time code or date/time at the
start of clip recording. Date/time is displayed
in the local time of the shooting location.
Set whether to display ATCB or ADate/TimeB
in the thumbnail menu [Thumbnail Text].
(A Page 65)
Data/time display depends on the settings in
[LCD/VF] B [Status Display] B [Date Style] of
the [Main Menu] screen. (A Page 91)
Time is displayed in 24-hour display
regardless of the [Time Style] setting.
Displays clip information (properties).
A
B
C
A OK Mark
Clip is appended with OK mark.
Memo :
● Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
B Continued From Mark
This mark indicates that the current clip is
continued from another SDHC card when
recording is divided and made on several
SDHC cards.
C Continue Mark
This mark indicates that the current clip will
continue to another SDHC card when
recording is divided and made on several
SDHC cards.
J Operation
Guide for the current operation buttons.
Guide
Moves the clip cursor to the top/bottom/left/
right.
Plays back the selected clip.
Appends an OK mark to the selected clip.
This is displayed when an OK mark is not
appended to the clip. (A Page 68)
Memo :
● This is disabled when the SDHC card is
locked. (Displayed in gray)
Deletes the OK mark from the selected clip.
This is displayed when an OK mark is
appended to the clip. (A Page 69)
Memo :
● This is disabled when the SDHC card is
locked. (Displayed in gray)
Deletes the selected clip.
(A Page 66)
63
Playback
Playing Back Recorded
Clips (continued)
Name
C Detailed
Properties
Thumbnail Screen (continued)
䡵 Detailed Properties (4x1 Thumbnails)
Screen
Description
Shows the detailed properties of the selected
clip. The following information is displayed.
File Format
: File format
Clip Name
: Clip name
Resolution
: Image size
Frame Rate
: Frame rate
Bit Rate
: Bit rate
Audio
: Audio format
Start TC
: Time code at the start of
recording
End TC
: Time code at the end of
recording
Duration
: Clip length
UB
: User’s bit
Creation Date : Date created
Memo :
● The information of time and date displays
in the following order, Year, Month, Date,
Time, Minute, Second and Time zone.
A
B
● A-B is the break character between Year,
Month and Date for each, and A:B is the
break character between Time, Minute and
Second for each, and ATB is the break
character Date and Time.
C
● AZB displays behind Time when Time zone is
set to AUTC+00:00B.
(Time and date display example)
In case of AUTC+00:00B 21:18:50 on
March 4th in 2009 (Western European
time zone):
D
Name
A Cursor
Description
Indicates the selected clip. Use the crossshaped button (H I) to move the cursor.
After power is turned on and SDHC card is
inserted, or when the camera recorder is
switched to Media mode (SD Card mode),
the cursor is positioned on top of the latest
clip.
When the camera recorder changes to the
thumbnail screen during playback, the cursor
is positioned on the clip that was played
back. If you play back the same clip again, it
will continue from where it was left off.
The default position of the cursor when
SDHC card slot is switched is on the
previously selected clip before the switch.
䡵 Example of the moving order of the cursor
(total 6 clips)
A2009-03-04T21:18:50ZB
In case of AUTC-05:00B 10:13:15 on
March 19th in 2009 (North American
Eastern time zone).
A2009-03-19T10:13:15-05:00B
Variable Frame : Variable frame (only in
Variable Frame Rec)
D Operation
Guide for the current operation buttons.
Guide
Moves the clip cursor to the left/right.
Plays back the selected clip.
Appends an OK mark to the selected clip.
This is displayed when an OK mark is not
appended to the clip. (A Page 68)
Memo :
● This is disabled when the SDHC card is
locked. (Displayed in gray)
Scrolls page
B Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
When there is a black space on the right of
the scroll bar (white), this indicates further
pages.
When the scroll bar (white) is at the right end,
this indicates the last page.
Deletes the OK mark from the selected clip.
This is displayed when an OK mark is
appended to the clip. (A Page 69)
Memo :
● This is disabled when the SDHC card is
locked. (Displayed in gray)
Deletes the selected clip. (A Page 66)
64
Thumbnail Menu
Playing Back
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel of the
camera recorder to play back.
A
B
Press the [MENU] button during thumbnail display to display
the thumbnail menu.
Press the [MENU] button during menu display to cancel the
settings and exit the menu.
Thumbnail Menu
Sub-Menu
C
Name
A
B
C
Button
Description
Plays back/pauses the selected clip.
Button
Skips in the reverse or forward
direction.
Button
Fast forwards in the reverse or forward
direction.
Button
Stops playback.
1 Select the clip to play back on the thumbnail screen.
Select the clip to play back with the cross-shaped
button (JKH I).
2 Press the playback/pause button.
Thumbnail Menu Screen
Item
Displays the information screen of the SDHC
card.
Detailed
Properties
For selecting the display method of the
thumbnail screen.
If a check is selected, the thumbnail screen will be
displayed as [Detailed Properties (4x1 Thumbnail)
Screen]. (A Page 64)
Thumbnail Text For selecting the display method for the
thumbnail text on the thumbnail screen.
TC
Displays the recording start time code at the
thumbnail text display area (below the thumbnail).
Date/Time
Displays the recording start date/time at the
thumbnail text display area (below the thumbnail).
Playback of the selected clip starts.
䡵 Time Code Playback
Time code or user’s bit recorded on an SDHC card can be
displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Memo :
● When [HD/SD-SDI Out] in the [A/V Out] menu is set to
AHD-SDIB or ASD-SDIB, time code is also output from the
[HD/SD-SDI] output terminal. (A Page 92)
● User’s bit output from the [HD/SD-SDI] output terminal is
used as a flag to determine valid video signals. Therefore,
accurate values will not be output.
● If a section without time code is played back, the time
code will stop. However, playback will continue.
Function
Media info
Delete Clip
For deleting clips. (A Page 66)
One Clip
Deletes the selected clip.
All Clips
Deletes all clips that are displayed.
Main Menu...
Opens the [Main Menu] screen. (A Page 74)
Exit
Exits and closes the menu.
65
Playback
2 Press the [USER2] button.
Deleting Clips
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
3 Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped button (JK),
and press the Set button (R).
Deleting starts.
For deleting clips.
[USER2] Button
[MENU] Button
Set Button (R)
3
Cross-shaped
Button
(JKH I)
[CANCEL] Button
Memo :
● Clips appended with OK marks cannot be deleted on the
camera recorder.
● Read-only clips can be deleted on a PC.
Deleting One Clip
You can delete a selected clip with any of the following
operations.
A Press [USER2] button when menu is not displayed.
B Perform [Delete Clip] B [One Clip] in thumbnail menu.
Memo :
● A clip cannot be deleted with the [USER2] button and
menu operation ([Delete Clip] B [One Clip]) under the
following situations.
● A clip with OK mark is selected.
● Write-protect switch of the SDHC card is set (
is
displayed).
Memo :
● Button operations are unavailable during deletion. The
deleting operation cannot be canceled.
● The cursor moves to the next clip (or previous clip if a next
clip does not exist) after deletion.
䡵 Deleting with [Delete Clip] B [One Clip] in the
menu
1 Select the clip to delete.
Select the clip to delete with the cross-shaped
button (JKH I).
䡵 During Thumbnail Screen
䡵 Deleting with [USER2] button
1 Select the clip to delete.
1
Select the clip to delete with the cross-shaped
button (JKH I).
1
2 Press the [MENU] button.
The thumbnail menu screen appears.
3 Select [Delete Clip] B [One Clip] and press the Set
button (R).
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
66
4 Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped button (JK),
and press the Set button (R).
Deleting starts.
3
Memo :
● Button operations are unavailable during deletion. The
deleting operation cannot be canceled.
● The cursor moves to the next clip (or previous clip if a next
clip does not exist) after deletion.
Deleting All Clips
Deletes all clips that are displayed.
1 Press the [MENU] button.
The thumbnail menu screen appears.
2 Select [Delete Clip] B [All Clips] in the menu.
䡵 During Playback or Pause Screen
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
3 Select [Delete] and press the Set button (R).
䡵 Deleting with [USER2] button
1 Press [USER2] button during clip playback.
Deleting starts.
Memo :
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
● Button operations are unavailable during deletion. The
deleting operation cannot be canceled.
● The time taken to delete clips depends on the number of
clips to be deleted.
2 Select [Delete] and press the Set button (R).
Deleting starts.
2
67
Playback
Appending and Deleting
OK Marks
OK Mark
You can append OK marks to the clips for important scenes.
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be deleted, thus
protecting the important clips.
When the camera recorder is in Media mode (SD Card
mode), you can delete the OK marks appended during
recording, or append/delete OK marks after shooting.
[USER1] Button
[MENU] Button
Set Button (R)
Memo :
● The [USER1] button is disabled (displayed in gray) and
OK marks cannot be appended when the write-protect
switch of the SDHC card is set (
is displayed).
● AOK Mark Added...B is displayed when changing marks
and other operations are unavailable.
䡵 During Playback or Pause Screen
Cross-shaped
Button
(JKH I)
1 Press [USER1] button during clip playback.
An OK mark is appended to the clip.
[CANCEL] Button
Appending OK Marks
䡵 During Thumbnail Screen
1 Select a clip without an OK mark and press the
[USER1] button.
An OK mark is appended to the clip.
1
OK Mark
Memo :
● The clip pauses when an OK mark is appended or deleted
during playback.
68
䡵 During Playback or Pause Screen
Deleting OK Marks
1 Press the [USER1] button when playing back a clip
appended with OK mark.
䡵 During Thumbnail Screen
1 Select a clip to delete OK mark and press the [USER1]
The OK mark is deleted.
button.
The OK mark is deleted.
1
Memo :
● The [USER1] button is disabled (displayed in gray) and
OK marks cannot be deleted when the write-protect
switch of the SDHC card is set (
is displayed).
● AOK Mark Added...B/AOK Mark Deleted...B is displayed
when changing marks and other operations are
unavailable.
69
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Basic Operations in Menu
Screen
Press the [MENU] button on the side control panel of the
camera recorder to display the menu screen on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder.
Various settings for shooting and playback can be configured
on the menu screen.
There are two types of menu screens - [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu].
[Main Menu] contains all the setting items of the camera
recorder, classified according to functions and uses, while
[Favorites Menu] allows users to customize the menu items
freely. (A Page 98)
The operating procedures and main screen displays are the
same for both menus.
The menu screen can also be displayed on external monitors
connected to the video signal output terminal.
(A Page 92 [Analog Out Char.])
(A Page 92 [SDI Out Char.])
Name
Description
E Cross-shaped
J : Moves the cursor upward.
K : Moves the cursor downward.
H : Moves back to the previous item.
I : Moves forward to the next item.
Button (JKH I)
F [CANCEL] Button
Cancels settings and returns to the
previous screen.
G [STATUS] Button
Switches between the [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] screens.
Display and Description of the Menu
Screen
䡵 Selecting Menu Items
F
G
A
B
Operation Buttons
C
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel of the
camera recorder to operate the menu.
D
H
I
J
E
K
Name
Description
A Status Display Recording, playback, etc. Displays the
current status.
Same display as the status screen.
䡵 During Camera mode :
[STBY], [REC], etc. (A Page 102)
䡵 During Media mode (SD Card mode) :
[PLAY], [STILL], etc. (A Page 109)
Name
A [MENU] Button
B [USER1] Button
Description
Displays the menu screen. ([Main
Menu] is displayed by default when
pressed.)
During normal usage, [Main Menu] is
displayed if the previous menu
operation ended at [Main Menu], and
[Favorites Menu] if the previous menu
operation ended at [Favorites Menu].
Press this button to close the menu
screen during menu display and return
to the normal screen.
Adds the selected menu or submenu
item to the [Favorites Menu].
(A Page 98)
C [USER2] Button
Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or
[UB Preset] setting screen. This button
is disabled in other screens.
D Set Button (R)
Sets the values and items.
70
B Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the crossshaped button (JK) to move the cursor.
C Menu Item
Displays the names of the menu item and
sub-menu.
Menu items with [...] after them indicates
that there is a sub-menu to access.
D Fixed Item
Items that cannot be changed are displayed
in gray and cannot be selected.
E [Back] Back
Select [Back] and press the Set button (R)
to return to the previous level.
F Menu Title
Title of the currently displayed menu.
G Remaining
Battery Power
:
:
:
:
:
Ample battery power.
Slightly reduced battery power.
Low battery power.
Empty battery power. (Blinks in red)
External power supply connected.
Memo :
● If the battery in use is not a
recommended one, the battery mark
which indicates the battery level may not
appear.
Name
H Header
I Scroll Bar
䡵 [Scene File]/[Picture File] (A Page 120)
Description
Indicates the current menu type with the
line color.
Blue
: [Main Menu] Screen
Green : [Favorites Menu]
(Operation screen)
Magenta : [Favorites Menu]
(Editing screen)
Indicates the scroll position.
A
B
F
C
G
H
J Setting Values Setting values for the menu items.
K Operation
For menus with sub-menus, values are not
displayed.
D
Guide for the current operation buttons.
E
Guide
䡵 [Clip Name Prefix] (A Page 76)
䡵 Changing Setting Values
A
C
A
D
B
E
F
F
D
B
E
Name
A Menu Item to
Change
B Operation Guide
C List of Setting
Values
Description
Menu item to be changed.
A list of setting values C appears in
a pop-up.
Guide for the current operation
buttons.
A pop-up displaying a list of setting
values for selection.
The height of the pop-up depends
on the number of settings available.
Use the scroll bar D to confirm the
current display status.
D Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
E Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the
cross-shaped button (JK) to move
the cursor.
F Setting Values
Before Change
Setting values before changing.
R appears at the beginning of the
item.
Name
Description
A Character Entry Field for entering the title.
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
Field
[Scene File]/[Picture File] subname or up
to 4 characters for the [Clip Name Prefix].
B Character
Cursor
C Character Keys Use the cross-shaped button (JKH I) to
move the key cursor D to the character
you want to enter.
D Key Cursor
Indicates the currently selected character
or item. Use the cross-shaped button
(JKH I) to move the cursor.
E Confirmation
Select [Set]/[Store] and press the Set
button (R) to confirm the title.
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button
(R) on the side control panel of the camera
recorder to abort character input and
return to the previous screen.
Buttons
Text Input with Software Keyboard
Use the software keyboard to enter the [Scene File]/
[Picture File] subname and [Clip Name Prefix].
Select a character using the key cursor D,
and press the Set button (R) to input the
selected character at the position of the
character cursor. The character cursor
moves to the next position on the right
each time a character is input.
The cursor can be moved using the arrow
keys F.
F Arrow Keys
Moves the position of the character cursor
B.
G [BS] Backspace Select [BS] and press the Set button (R)
Key
on the side control panel of the camera
recorder to delete the character on the left
of the character cursor B.
H [SP] Space Key Select [SP] and press the Set button (R)
on the side control panel of the camera
recorder to enter a space at the current
position of the character cursor B.
71
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Menu Screen Hierarchical
Chart
Main Menu... (A Page 74)
Record Set... (A Page 75)
Record Format... (A Page 75)
System Definition
File Format
Camera Resolution
Frame & Bit Rate
Aspect Ratio
Rec Mode... (A Page 76)
Frame Rate
Pre Rec Time
Clip Set... (A Page 76)
Clip Name Prefix
Reset Clip Number
Audio Set... (A Page 77)
Input1 Mic Ref.
Input2 Mic Ref.
Mic Wind Cut
Audio Ref. Level
Camera Function... (A Page 78)
Bars
Audio Limiter
Shutter
Test Tone
AE LEVEL
AE Speed
ALC Limit
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
EEI Limit
Smooth Trans
Switch Set... (A Page 79)
FULL AUTO... (A Page 81)
Camera Process... (A Page 82)
Detail
Adjust... (A Page 84)
Master Black
Black Toe
Knee
White Clip
Gamma
White Balance... (A Page 85)
Color Matrix
Adjust...(A Page 86)
Color Gain
DNR
Reverse Picture
Reset Process
Memo :
● A [Back] item (omitted in the chart) can be found at the end of each menu item. Select [Back] and press the Set button (R) to
return to the previous level.
72
TC/UB... (A Page 88)
TCG Source
TC Preset
UB Preset
Drop
LCD/VF... (A Page 88)
Shooting Assist... (A Page 89)
Marker Setting... (A Page 90)
Status Display... (A Page 90)
LCD + VF
VF Display
LCD Mirror Mode
A/V Out... (A Page 92)
Output Terminal
Set Up
HD/SD-SDI Out
Down Convert
Analog Out Char.
SDI Out Char.
Audio Monitor
Others... (A Page 93)
Alarm Level
Genlock Input
Genlock Adjust... (A Page 96)
Return Input
Return Aspect
Tally System
Front Tally
Back Tally
1394 Rec Trigger
1394 Auto Power Off
Mode LED
Reset All
Date/Time
Time Zone
System Information
Media... (A Page 97)
Format Media
Restore Media
Setup File Manage... (A Page 97)
Load File...
Store File...
Reset File...
Memo :
● A [Back] item (omitted in the chart) can be found at the end of each menu item. Select [Back] and press the Set button (R) to
return to the previous level.
73
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Main Menu Screen
Some menus cannot be set depending on the operating mode or status of the camera recorder. These items are displayed in
gray, and they cannot be selected.
Item
Function
Record Set...
Menu screen for specifying video or audio settings during shooting and playback.
The cursor does not move to this item during recording or in Media mode. (A Page 75)
Camera Function...
Menu screen for specifying operation settings during shooting.
The cursor moves to this item only in Camera mode. (A Page 78)
Camera Process...
Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera images.
The cursor does not move to this item in the AUX and Media modes. (A Page 82)
TC/UB...
Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.
The cursor does not move to this item during recording. (A Page 88)
LCD/VF...
Item for specifying settings related to the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen.
This menu screen can be used to specify settings related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern display, screen
size, marker, and safety zone. In addition, it is also used for selecting whether to display characters on the LCD
monitor or viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the picture quality of the LCD monitor screen.
The cursor does not move to this item in Media mode. (A Page 88)
A/V Out...
Item for specifying connection settings with external devices. (A Page 92)
Others...
Menu screen for specifying the settings of other functions.
Use this item to adjust the alarm volume, front/back tally lamp settings, status indicator, 1394 input settings, genlock
input and return video input settings, date/time, time zone, and other settings. It can also be used to reset the menu
settings to their default values. (A Page 93)
Media...
Item for formatting or restoring the SDHC card. (A Page 97)
Setup File Manage...
Displays the [Setup File Manage] menu screen.
Settings of the menu screen can be saved as a file on the camera recorder or an SDHC card, and the saved
settings can be loaded when necessary.
The cursor does not move to this item during recording or in Media mode. (A Page 97)
Exit
Select this item and press the Set button (R) to return to the normal screen.
74
Record Set Menu
Record Format Menu
After setting of all items in the [Record Format] menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the screen to apply the new
settings on the camera recorder and switch the record format. A APlease WaitB message appears during switching.
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
System Definition
Setting Values
HD (MPEG2)
SD (DV)
Function
For selecting a system definition.
HD (MPEG2) : Records in HD (High Definition) quality.
SD (DV)
: Records in SD (Standard Definition) quality.
Note :
● The selectable options for the [File Format], [Camera Resolution], and
[Frame & Bit Rate] settings vary depending on the setting of this item.
● When the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB, this item is fixed at ASD
(DV)B. (U model)
File Format
When [System Definition] is
AHD (MPEG2)B
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to the SDHC card.
QuickTime
MP4
When [System Definition] is ASD QuickTime
(DV)B
AVI
Camera Resolution
1920x1080
1440x1080
1280x720
720 x 480
720 x 576
Frame & Bit Rate
When [Camera Resolution] is
A1280x720B
60p (HQ) (U model),
60p (SP), 30p (HQ), 30p
(SP),
50p (HQ) (E model),
50p (SP), 25p (HQ), 25p
(SP), 24p (HQ), 24p (SP)
When [Camera Resolution] is
A1440x1080B, and [File Format]
is AQuickTimeB
60i (HQ) (U model),
60i (SP),
When [Camera Resolution] is
A1440x1080B, and [File Format]
is AMP4B
60i (SP) (U model),
When [Camera Resolution] is
A1920x1080B
60i (HQ) (U model),
30p (HQ),
50i (HQ) (E model),
50i (SP)
For setting the size of the recorded image when [System Definition] is set to
AHD (MPEG2)B. (Horizontal x vertical)
Memo :
● When [System Definition] is set to ASD (DV)B, this item is fixed as follows for
the different models.
● U model : 720 x 480
● E model : 720 x 576
● The selectable values of [Frame & Bit Rate] vary according to the setting of
this item.
For setting the frame rate and encoding bit rate when [System Definition] is set
to AHD (MPEG2)B.
Selection can be made from 19 combinations of frame rate (60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p, 60i, 50i) and bit rate (HQ (35Mbps) VBR), (SP (25 Mbps/19 Mbps) CBR).
Memo :
● When [System Definition] is set to ASD (DV)B, this item is fixed as follows for
the different models.
● U model : 60i
● E model : 50i
● The selectable items vary according to the [File Format] and
[Camera Resolution] settings.
50i (SP) (E model)
50i (HQ) (E model),
25p (HQ), 24p (HQ)
Aspect Ratio
16:9
4:3
For setting the aspect ratio of the recorded image when [System Definition] is
set to ASD (DV)B.
Memo :
● When [System Definition] is set to AHD (MPEG2)B, this item is fixed at
A16:9B.
75
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Record Set Menu
(continued)
Rec Mode Menu
Item
Rec Mode
Setting Values
Normal
Memo :
Pre Rec
Clip Continuous
Variable Frame
Frame Rate
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is
A30p (HQ)B
60, 48, 40,
30,
24, 20, 15, 12, 10
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is
A24p (HQ)B
60, 48, 40, 30,
24,
20, 15, 12, 10
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is
A25p (HQ)B
50, 40,
25,
20, 15, 12.5, 10
Pre Rec Time
Function
For selecting the record mode for recording to the SDHC card. (A Page 58)
5sec,
10sec, 20sec
● [Variable Frame] is selectable when [Camera Resolution] is set to
A1280x720B, and [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to A30p (HQ)B, A24p (HQ)B, or
A25p (HQ)B.
For setting the recording [Frame Rate] when [Rec Mode] is set to
[Variable Frame].
Memo :
● When [AE LEVEL] in the [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set]
menu is set to AAE LEVEL/VFRB, you can use the cross-shaped button (H I)
to select the frame rate during Variable Frame Rec. In modes other than
Variable Frame Rec, the cross-shaped button (H I) functions as the [AE
LEVEL] setting button. (A Page 80)
● When [Frame Rate] is changed and the shutter speed becomes a value that is
invalid for the current [Frame Rate], the shutter speed is automatically
changed to match the current [Frame Rate].
For setting the pre-recording time when [Rec Mode] is set to APre RecB.
Clip Set Menu
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Clip Name Prefix
Reset Clip Number
76
Setting Values
xxxG
(The default value of xxx
is the last three digits of
the serial number.)
^
Function
For setting the first four characters of the name of the clip file to be recorded to
the SDHC card.
Enter any of the 38 characters including alphabets (upper case), numbers
(0 to 9), “_” (underscore), and “-” (hyphen) using the software keyboard.
(A Page 71 [Text Input with Software Keyboard])
For assigning a new number to (Clip Number) by resetting it (0001). Select
[Reset] and press the Set button (R) to reset the number.
When other clips exist on the SDHC card, the smallest available number is
used after reset.
Example: If the [Clip Name Prefix] is AABCDB, and AABCD0001B already
exists on the SDHC card, AABCD0002B will be assigned.
Audio Set Menu
Item
Setting Values
Function
Input1 Mic Ref.
-50dB
-60dB
For setting the reference input level when the [AUDIO INPUT1] button is set to AMICB or
AMIC+48VB.
-50dB : Sets -50 dB as the reference value.
-60dB : Sets -60 dB as the reference value.
Input2 Mic Ref.
-50dB
-60dB
For setting the reference input level when the [AUDIO INPUT2] button is set to AMICB or
AMIC+48VB.
-50dB : Sets -50 dB as the reference value.
-60dB : Sets -60 dB as the reference value.
Mic Wind Cut
Both
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of the audio input signals (low-cut) when
the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] button is set to AMICB or AMIC+48VB. Set this item to reduce wind
noise from the microphone.
Both : Enables low-cut on both the [INPUT1] and [INPUT2] terminals.
Input2 : Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT2] terminal only.
Input1 : Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT1] terminal only.
Off
: Disables low-cut.
Input2
Input1
Off
Audio Ref. Level
-12dB
-20dB
For setting the audio reference level to be recorded to the SDHC card. (Applies to both
[CH1/CH2].)
-20dB : Outputs signals of the reference level when the meter is at -20 dBFS.
-12dB : Outputs signals of the reference level when the meter is at -12 dBFS.
Audio Limiter
On
For specifying whether to trigger the limiter when the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch
is set to AMANUALB.
On
: Triggers the limiter when excessive audio signals are input, and compresses the
recording level.
Off
: Does not trigger limiter.
Off
Test Tone
On
Off
For specifying whether to output the audio test signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.
On
: Audio test signals are output.
Off
: Audio test signals are not output.
77
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Function Menu
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Bars
Setting Values
On
Off
Function
For setting whether to output color bars.
On
: Color bars are output.
Off
: Color bars are not output.
Memo :
● When the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder is set to AONB, and [Bars] in the
[FULL AUTO] menu is set to AOffB, this item is set to AOffB automatically. (A Page 81)
Shutter
EEI
Variable
Step
AE LEVEL
AE Speed
+3 to +1,
For specifying shutter-related settings.
Use this item to set to AStepB (fixed value) or AVariableB when operating with the crossshaped button (JK) on the right of the camera recorder. During automatic control, this is
set to AEEIB.
EEI
: Sets to automatic control.
Variable : Sets to variable scan. Use this setting such as when shooting a PC monitor.
Step
: Sets to step shutter, which switches the shutter speed by a fixed value.
Normal,
-1 to -3
For setting the convergence level during AE (Auto Exposure).
This can also be adjusted using the cross-shaped button (H I) on the right of the camera
recorder.
Fast
For setting the convergence speed during AE (Auto Exposure).
Middle
Slow
ALC Limit
18dB
12dB
6dB
For setting the maximum gain value of AALCB, which electrically boosts the sensitivity level
according to the brightness automatically.
18dB
: Sets the maximum ALC gain value to +18 dB.
12dB
: Sets the maximum ALC gain value to +12 dB.
6dB
: Sets the maximum ALC gain value to +6 dB.
Auto Iris Limit
(OPEN)
F5.6, F4, F2.8, F2,
Auto Iris Limit
(CLOSE)
F16,
EEI Limit
4F-stop
3F-stop
2F-stop
For setting the shutter speed control range when EEI is enabled.
4F-stop : Moves iris control by 4 f/stops in EEI.
3F-stop : Moves iris control by 3 f/stops in EEI.
2F-stop : Moves iris control by 2 f/stops in EEI.
Smooth Trans
Fast
For setting the shock reduction function, which slows down the sudden change when
switching with the [GAIN] or [WHT.BAL.] selection switch.
However, this function is disabled when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is
set to AONB, or when switching the gain selection switch while AALCB is set.
Fast
: Runs the Smooth Trans function at high speed.
Middle : Runs the Smooth Trans function at medium speed.
Slow
: Runs the Smooth Trans function at low speed.
Off
: Deactivates the Smooth Trans function.
For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when auto iris is enabled.
F1.6,
F1.4
For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when auto iris is enabled.
F11,
F8, F5.6,
Middle
Slow
Off
Switch Set...
For specifying the switch settings of the camera recorder. (A Page 79)
FULL AUTO...
For specifying settings when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is set to AONB. (A Page 81)
78
Switch Set Item
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
FAW
Setting Values
None
PRESET
A
B
GAIN L
GAIN M
ALC, 18dB, 15dB,
12dB, 9dB, 6dB, 3dB,
0dB
GAIN H
USER1
USER2
USER3
Function
For assigning the FAW (Fulltime Auto White Balance) function to a position on the [WHT.BAL.]
selection switch.
This is fixed at AFAWB when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is set to AONB.
None
: FAW function is not assigned.
PRESET
: Assigns FAW to the PRESET position.
A
: Assigns FAW to the A position.
B
: Assigns FAW to the B position.
For setting the gain value of each position on the [GAIN] selection switch.
This is fixed at AALCB when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is set to AONB.
(Default values GAIN L: 0dB, GAIN M: 9dB, GAIN H: 18dB)
By assigning one of the following functions to each of the [USER1]/[USER2]/[USER3] buttons, these buttons can be
used to control the assigned function (on/off, start, switch).
Set according to the shooting conditions. Functions can be assigned only in Camera mode (except AUX mode).
(Default values USER1: Bars, USER2: B.Stretch3, USER3: Load File)
Setting Values
LENS RET
No function is assigned.
Bars
Assigns the function of [Bars] in the [Camera Function] menu. (A Page 78)
Load File
Assigns the function of [Load File] in the [Setup File Manage] menu. (A Page 97)
Clip Review
Assigns the Clip Review function. (A Page 56)
B.Stretch1
B.Stretch2
B.Stretch3
B.Stretch4
B.Stretch5
B.Compress1
B.Compress2
B.Compress3
B.Compress4
B.Compress5
Assigns the functions of [Stretch Level] and [Compress Level] under [Black Toe] in the
[Camera Process] menu. (A Page 82)
Clip Review
OK Mark
Focus Assist
Return
Clip Review
Description
None
Last 5 sec
Top 5 sec
CLIP
For assigning a function to the [RET] button on the lens. This function does not work if the [RET]
button is not available on the lens in use.
Clip Review : Assigns the Clip Review function to the [RET] button. (A Page 56)
OK Mark
: Assigns the OK mark function to the [RET] button. This function operates during
shooting. (A Page 58)
Focus Assist : Assigns the Focus Assist function to the [RET] button. (A Page 37)
Return
: Assigns the return video display function to the [RET] button. (A Page 128)
For specifying the operation when [LENS RET] is set to AClip ReviewB.
Last 5 sec
: Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the ending.
Top 5 sec
: Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the beginning.
CLIP
: Views the entire clip.
Memo :
● Selectable when [LENS RET] is set to AClip ReviewB, or when any of the [USER1]/[USER2]/
[USER3] buttons is set to AClip ReviewB.
79
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Function Menu
(continued)
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
SKIN A./SPOT M.
Setting Values
Skin Area
Spot Meter
Function
For assigning the function of the [SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch on the camera recorder.
Skin Area
: Assigns the Skin Detail function and its area display.
Spot Meter
: Assigns the Spot Meter display function.
Memo :
● When ASkin AreaB is selected, [Skin Detect] is forcibly set to AOnB when the [SKIN AREA/
SPOT METER] switch is flipped, even if [Skin Detect] is set to AOffB. Alternatively, you can set
[Skin Detect] to AOffB, and turn the Skin Detail function On/Off by flipping the lever whenever
necessary. (A Page 84)
SPOT METER
Max&Min
Min
Max
Manual
For specifying the operation of [Spot Meter]. (A Page 55)
Max&Min
: Displays the brightest and darkest areas of the image.
Min
: Displays the darkest area of the image.
Max
: Displays the brightest area of the image.
Manual
: Displays the image brightness at a specified position.
Memo :
● This item is selectable when [SKIN A./SPOT M.] is set to ASpot MeterB. When ASkin AreaB is
set, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.
● Positions are detected automatically when this item is set to AMax&MinB, AMinB, or AMaxB.
When set to AManualB, it functions in a fixed position.
AE LEVEL
80
AE LEVEL/VFR
AE LEVEL
Disable
For specifying the operation of the cross-shaped button (H I) on the right of the camera
recorder.
AE LEVEL/VFR: Sets the number of frames during Variable Frame Rec, and operates as the
AE LEVEL setting button in other cases. (A Page 60)
AE LEVEL
: Operates as the AE LEVEL setting button at all times.
Disable
: Disables the button.
FULL AUTO Item
This is used to set specific functions to the auto mode when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is set to AONB.
Item
Gain
Setting Values
SW Set
ALC
Function
SW Set
ALC
: Sets gain according to the [GAIN] selection switch.
: Sets gain to the AALCB (forced auto) mode.
Memo :
● When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AALCB and cannot
be selected. (A Page 131)
Iris Control
Off
Auto
Off
Auto
: Iris control is not performed.
: Sets iris control to the forced auto mode.
Memo :
● When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AAutoB and cannot
be selected. (A Page 131)
● When the iris mode switch of the lens is set to AAB (auto), the iris is fixed at the point of time
when this item is switched from AAutoB to AOffB.
Shutter
SW Set
EEI
SW Set
EEI
: Sets shutter according to the switch.
: Sets shutter to the forced auto mode.
Memo :
● When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AEEIB and cannot
be selected. (A Page 131)
White Balance
SW Set
FAW
SW Set
FAW
: Sets white balance according to the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch.
: Sets white balance to the forced auto mode.
Memo :
● When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AFAWB and cannot
be selected. (A Page 131)
Bars
Menu Set
Off
Menu Set
Off
: Sets color bar output according to the menu settings (via switch operation).
: Sets color bar output to the forced Off mode.
Memo :
● When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AOffB and cannot be
selected. (A Page 131)
Audio
SW Set
Auto
SW Set
Auto
: Sets the audio recording level according to the switch.
: Sets the audio recording level to the forced auto mode.
81
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Process Menu
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Detail
Setting Values
Max, 9 to 1,
Normal,
-1 to -9, Min, Off
Adjust...
Function
For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement level.
Increase the number : Sharpens the contour.
Decrease the number : Softens the contour.
Off
: Disables this function.
For specifying the detailed settings of the contour (detail). (A Page 84)
Memo :
● This item cannot be selected when [Detail] is set to AOffB.
Master Black
Max, 9 to 1,
Normal,
-1 to -9, Min
Black Toe
Compress
Stretch
Normal
Stretch Level
Level 5
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Compress
Level
Level 1
Point Level
15% to 11%
Stretch amount increases when a larger value is specified.
Memo :
● This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is set to AStretchB. Otherwise, this item appears
as A---B and cannot be selected.
Compression amount increases when a larger value is specified.
Memo :
9% to 5%
Manual
Auto
Level
For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item according to the condition of the captured
video signals.
Compress : Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase the contrast when the entire image
appears bright and contrast is weak. Specify the compression amount with
[Compress Level].
Stretch
: Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to stretch the signals of these areas
only, thereby showing the contrast between bright and dark areas more clearly.
Specify the stretch amount with Stretch Level.
Normal
: Normal condition.
● This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is set to ACompressB. Otherwise, this item
appears as A---B and cannot be selected.
10%,
Knee
For adjusting the pedestal level (master black) that serves as the reference black.
Increase the number : Raises the pedestal level.
Decrease the number : Lowers the pedestal level.
100%
95%, 90%, 85%,
80%, 75%, 70%
For specifying the luminance point at which the dark area is to be stretched or compressed.
Memo :
● When [Black Toe] is set to ANormalB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.
For specifying the AKneeB operation, which compresses video signals beyond a certain level to
show the gradation of the highlighted portion. To check the gradation of a bright area, set to
AManualB and adjust the knee point manually.
Manual : Enables manual adjustment of the knee point (starting point of knee operation) using
ALevelB.
Auto
: Adjusts the knee point (starting point of knee operation) automatically according to the
luminance level.
For setting the starting point of knee compression (knee point).
Increase the number : Increases the knee point level.
Decrease the number : Decreases the knee point level.
Memo :
● When [Knee] is set to AAutoB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.
Sensitivity
Fast
Middle
Slow
For setting the response speed of the AKneeB operation when [Knee] is set to AAutoB.
Set to ASlowB when shooting an object under a condition where there is drastic change in the
light intensity.
Memo :
● When [Knee] is set to AManualB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.
82
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Setting Values
Function
White Clip
100%
108%
For setting the point to apply white clip for input video signals with a high luminance level.
100%
: Applies white clip at the point where the luminance level is 100 %. Even when this
item is set to A108%B, it switches automatically to A100%B if the screen appears too
white. Set to this value when the system in use limits Y output signals within 100 %.
108%
: Applies white clip at the point where the luminance level is 108 %.
Gamma
Film Out
Cinema
Standard
Off
For adjusting the gamma curve that determines the gradation expression.
Film Out : Sets to a gamma curve that focuses on the gradation expression of dark areas in
order to ease post-processing of movie film output.
Cinema : Sets to a gamma curve with similar gradation to the screen characteristics of movies.
Standard : Sets to a standard gamma curve.
Off
: Disables gamma curve adjustment.
Max, 4 to1,
Normal,
-1 to -4, Min
This item can be specified separately when [Gamma] is set to AStandardB, ACinemaB, or AFilm
OutB.
Increase the number : Enhances the gradation of black. However, the gradation of bright areas
deteriorates.
Decrease the number : Enhances the gradation of bright areas. However, the gradation of black
deteriorates.
Master Level
Memo :
● When [Gamma] is set to AOffB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.
R Level
G Level
B Level
Max, 4 to1,
Normal,
-1 to -4, Min
Gamma curves can be adjusted for each of R, G, and B.
Use this to adjust to a color tone that cannot be expressed by the [Color Matrix] setting.
Memo :
● When [Gamma] is set to AOffB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.
White Balance...
Menu for adjusting white balance. (A Page 85)
Color Matrix
Cinema Subdued
Cinema Vivid
Standard
Off
Adjust...
Color Gain
For setting the color matrix.
Cinema Subdued
: Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to the screen
characteristics of movies.
Cinema Vivid
: Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the screen characteristics of
movies.
Standard
: Sets to a standard color matrix.
Off
: Sets the color matrix function to Off.
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a color according to the user’s preference.
This item cannot be selected when [Color Matrix] is set to AOffB. (A Page 86)
Off, Min, -1 to -9,
Normal
9 to 1, Max
For adjusting the video signal color level.
Off
: Sets the video to black-and-white.
Increase the number : Makes the colors more dense.
Decrease the number : Makes the colors less dense.
Memo :
● Images are displayed in black-and-white when this is set to AOffB.
DNR
On
Off
For setting the DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) function. The S/N ratio of the video can be
enhanced by setting [DNR] to AOnB.
On
: Enables noise reduction.
Off
: Disables noise reduction.
Memo :
● A retained image may appear when this is set to AOnB.
Reverse Picture
Reset Process
Rotate
Off
For recording images correctly by reversing the image horizontally or vertically (Rotate) when
the lens image appears upside down or laterally inverted.
Rotate : Enables horizontal/vertical inversion of the image.
Off
: Disables horizontal/vertical inversion of the image.
^
Restores all items in the [Camera Process] menu to their default settings.
83
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Process Menu
(continued)
Detail/Adjust... Item
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
V/H Balance
Setting Values
H-Max, 4 to1,
Normal,
-1 to -4, H-Min
H Frequency
High
Middle
Low
V Frequency
High
Low
Function
For setting the H/V balance to enhance contour (detail) in the horizontal (H) or vertical (V)
direction.
Increase the number : Enhances contour in the horizontal direction.
Decrease the number : Enhances contour in the vertical direction.
For specifying the correction frequency of the horizontal contour. Set this according to the object.
High
: Emphasizes the high frequency range. Use this when shooting objects with fine
patterns.
Middle : Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
Low
: Emphasizes the low frequency range. Use this when shooting objects with large
patterns.
For specifying the correction frequency of the vertical contour. Set this according to the object.
Low
: Emphasizes the low frequency range.
High
: Emphasizes the high frequency range.
Memo :
● This item can only be selected when [Camera Resolution] of [Record Format] in the
[Record Set] menu is set to A1280x720B. (A Page 75)
Skin Detect
On
Off
For turning On/Off the Skin Detail function, which is used to adjust the contour correction effect
of the colors captured by the [Skin Color Adjust] menu.
On
: Enables the Skin Detail function. (Softens the detail at areas where skin tone is
detected.)
Off
: Disables the Skin Detail function.
Memo :
● Even if [Skin Detect] is set to AOffB, [Skin Detect] is forcibly set to AOnB when the
[SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch is flipped. Alternatively, you can set [Skin Detect] to AOffB,
and turn the Skin Detail function On/Off by flipping the lever whenever necessary.
Level
-3
-2
-1
Skin Color
Adjust...
For setting the level of contour correction (degree of softening) using the Skin Detail function.
-3
: High level of contour correction (degree of softening)
-2
: Medium level of contour correction (degree of softening)
-1
: Low level of contour correction (degree of softening)
For setting the Skin Detail function. (A Page 114)
Skin Color
Detect
Execute
Skin Color
Range
Wide, 9 to 1,
Stop
Normal,
-1 to -9, Narrow
For capturing the skin color.
Execute : Captures the color that triggers the Skin Detail function.
Stop
: Disables capturing of the color that triggers the Skin Detail function.
For adjusting the range of skin tone to trigger the Skin Detail function. Adjust accordingly while
checking the color range visually.
Increase the number : Widens the range.
Decrease the number : Narrows the range.
Memo :
● When [Color Gain] in the [Camera Process] menu is set to AOffB, only the area where Skin
Detail is functioning is displayed in skin tone. (A Page 83)
84
White Balance Item
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Setting Values
Function
Preset Temp.
2800K, 3200K,
3400K, 4200K,
4800K, 5200K,
5600K, 6500K,
7500K
For setting the color temperature when the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch of the camera recorder
is set to APRESETB.
Alternative Temp.
2800K, 3200K,
3400K, 4200K,
4800K, 5200K,
5600K, 6500K,
7500K
For setting the alternative color temperature in the Preset mode.
When the [WHT.BAL.] switch of the camera recorder is set to APRESETB, pressing the [AWB]
button each time switches the color temperature setting in the Preset mode.
([Preset Temp.] 1 [Alternative Temp.])
White Paint R
Max, 30 to 1,
For adjusting the R (red) component in the AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.
Increase the number : Strengthens the red.
Decrease the number : Weakens the red.
Normal,
-1 to -31, Min
Memo :
● This item is selectable when the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch on the right of the camera
recorder is set to AAB or ABB. When APRESETB is set, this item appears as A---B and cannot
be selected.
● Different values can be specified for AAB and ABB.
● After the [AWB] (Auto White Balance) button is pressed to readjust the white balance while
[Clear Paint After AWB] set to AOnB, [White Paint R] switches automatically to ANormalB.
White Paint B
Max, 30 to 1,
Normal,
-1 to -31, Min
For adjusting the B (blue) component in the AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.
Increase the number : Strengthens the blue.
Decrease the number : Weakens the blue.
Memo :
● This item is selectable when the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch on the right of the camera
recorder is set to AAB or ABB. When APRESETB is set, this item appears as A---B and cannot
be selected.
● Different values can be specified for AAB and ABB.
● After the [AWB] (Auto White Balance) button is pressed to readjust the white balance while
[Clear Paint After AWB] set to AOnB, [White Paint B] switches automatically to ANormalB.
Clear Paint After
AWB
On
Shading Mode
Manual
Off
Preset
Adjust...
For specifying whether to clear the [White Paint R]/[White Paint B] settings after executing AWB
(Auto White Balance).
On
: [White Paint R]/[White Paint B] are set to ANormalB after executing AWB.
Off
: [White Paint R]/[White Paint B] are not changed after executing AWB.
For specifying white shading adjustment settings. (A Page 44)
Preset : Sets white shading adjustment to a fixed level. Manual adjustment is disabled.
Manual : Enables manual white shading adjustment.
For making white shading adjustments.
Memo :
● This item cannot be selected when [Shading Mode] is set to APresetB.
85
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Process Menu
(continued)
Shading Mode/Adjust Item
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
● This item is selectable only when [Shading Mode] is set to AManualB. [R Level], [G Level], and [B Level] cannot be selected when
this is set to APresetB.
● The screen switches to a color display, and the displays for Bars, Zebra and the Focus Assist mode are temporarily set to AOFFB,
while the AB & WB mode in the [VF Display] menu temporarily switches to AColorB.
Item
R Level
Setting Values
Max, 126 to 1,
Normal,
-1 to -127, Min
G Level
Max, 126 to 1,
Normal,
-1 to -127, Min
B Level
Max, 126 to 1,
Normal,
-1 to -127, Min
Function
For adjusting the red level of white shading when [Shading Mode] is set to AManualB.
Increase the number : Decreases the red level at the bottom of the screen, and increases the
red level at the top of the screen.
Decrease the number : Decreases the red level at the top of the screen, and increases the red
level at the bottom of the screen.
For adjusting the green level of white shading when [Shading Mode] is set to AManualB.
Increase the number : Decreases the green level at the bottom of the screen, and increases
the green level at the top of the screen.
Decrease the number : Decreases the green level at the top of the screen, and increases the
green level at the bottom of the screen.
For adjusting the blue level of white shading when [Shading Mode] is set to AManualB.
Increase the number : Decreases the blue level at the bottom of the screen, and increases the
blue level at the top of the screen.
Decrease the number : Decreases the blue level at the top of the screen, and increases the
blue level at the bottom of the screen.
Color Matrix/Adjust Item
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a color according to the user’s preference.
The adjusted values of AStandardB, ACinema VividB, and ACinema SubduedB in [Color Matrix] can be stored individually.
(A Page 83)
Item
Mg&R Mg Level
Mg&R R Level
Setting Values
Max, 19 to 1,
Normal,
-1 to -19, Min
Function
For adjusting the magenta/red level of the video toward magenta.
Increase the number : Enhances the magenta component of magenta/red.
Decrease the number : Reduces the magenta component of magenta/red.
For adjusting the magenta/red level of the video toward red.
Increase the number : Enhances the red component of magenta/red.
Decrease the number : Reduces the red component of magenta/red.
R&Yl R Level
For adjusting the red/yellow level of the video toward red.
Increase the number : Enhances the red component of red/yellow.
Decrease the number : Reduces the red component of red/yellow.
R&Yl Yl Level
For adjusting the red/yellow level of the video toward yellow.
Increase the number : Enhances the yellow component of red/yellow.
Decrease the number : Reduces the yellow component of red/yellow.
Yl&G Yl Level
For adjusting the yellow/green level of the video toward yellow.
Increase the number : Enhances the green component of yellow/green.
Decrease the number : Reduces the yellow component of yellow/green.
Yl&G G Level
For adjusting the yellow/green level of the video toward green.
Increase the number : Enhances the green component of yellow/green.
Decrease the number : Reduces the green component of yellow/green.
Yl&G Mask Range Max, 19 to 11,
10,
9 to 1, Min
For adjusting the extent of effect on the skin tone (color near the I-axis) when [Yl&G Yl Level]
and [Yl&G G Level] are adjusted.
Increase the number : Reduces the effect on the skin tone.
Decrease the number : Increases the effect on the skin tone.
Memo :
● When green is enhanced in the + direction with [Yl&G G Level], increasing the
[Yl&G Mask Range] value helps to prevent the skin tone from becoming greenish.
● When [Yl&G Yl Level] and [Yl&G G Level] are set to ANormalB, no changes will be observed
on the screen when the [Yl&G Mask Range] value is changed.
86
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
G&Cy G Level
G&Cy Cy Level
Setting Values
Max, 19 to 1,
Normal,
-1 to -19, Min
Function
For adjusting the green/cyan level of the video toward green.
Increase the number : Enhances the green component of green/cyan.
Decrease the number : Reduces the green component of green/cyan.
For adjusting the green/cyan level of the video toward cyan.
Increase the number : Enhances the cyan component of green/cyan.
Decrease the number : Reduces the cyan component of green/cyan.
Cy&B Cy Level
For adjusting the cyan/blue level of the video toward cyan.
Increase the number : Enhances the cyan component of cyan/blue.
Decrease the number : Reduces the cyan component of cyan/blue.
Cy&B B Level
For adjusting the cyan/blue level of the video toward blue.
Increase the number : Enhances the blue component of cyan/blue.
Decrease the number : Reduces the blue component of cyan/blue.
B&Mg B Level
For adjusting the blue/magenta level of the video toward blue.
Increase the number : Enhances the blue component of blue/magenta.
Decrease the number : Reduces the blue component of blue/magenta.
B&Mg Mg Level
For adjusting the blue/magenta level of the video toward magenta.
Increase the number : Enhances the magenta component of blue/magenta.
Decrease the number : Reduces the magenta component of blue/magenta.
R Rotation
G Rotation
B Rotation
Max, 4 to1,
Normal,
-1 to -4, Min
For adjusting the hue of the R-axis (red and cyan).
Increase the number : Rotates hue of red toward yellow, and cyan toward blue.
Decrease the number : Rotates hue of red toward magenta, and cyan toward green.
For adjusting the hue of the G-axis (green and magenta).
Increase the number : Rotates hue of green toward blue, and magenta toward red.
Decrease the number : Rotates hue of green toward yellow, and magenta toward blue.
For adjusting the hue of the B-axis (blue and yellow).
Increase the number : Rotates hue of blue toward magenta, and yellow toward green.
Decrease the number : Rotates hue of blue toward cyan, and yellow toward red.
87
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
TC/UB Menu
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
TCG Source
Setting Values
Internal
Function
For selecting the source of the time code generator.
Internal
: Selects the built-in time code generator of the camera recorder.
External
: Selects the time code generator connected to the [TC IN] terminal.
External
Memo :
● If this item is set to AExternalB, [TC Preset], [UB Preset], and [Drop Frame] cannot be set.
TC Preset
^
For setting the time code (hour, minute, second, frame).
Display
: Drop setting
02:02:25.20
: Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20
UB Preset
^
For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)
Display
: AB CD EF 01
Drop Frame
Non Drop
Drop
For setting the framing mode of the time code generator.
Non Drop : Internal time code generator works in the non-drop-frame mode. Use this setting
when placing emphasis on the number of frames.
Drop
: Internal time code generator works in the drop-frame mode. Use this setting when
placing emphasis on the recording time.
Memo :
● This item can be set only when the frame rate of [Frame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Set] B
[Record Format] menu is set to A60pB, A30pB, or A60iB. When the frame rate is A24pB, ANon
DropB becomes fixed and cannot be selected. When the frame rate is A50pB, A25pB, or A50iB,
this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)
LCD/VF Menu
Item
Setting Values
Function
Shooting Assist
Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function. (A Page 89)
Marker Setting...
For setting items such as the safety zone and center mark. (A Page 90)
Status Display...
For setting displays related to the status screen. (A Page 90)
LCD + VF
On
Off
VF Display
B&W
Color
For selecting a method to switch between the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen displays.
(A Page 30)
On
: Displays images on the viewfinder at all times.
Off
: Turns off the viewfinder screen display when the LCD monitor is turned on.
For selecting whether to display the image on the viewfinder screen in color or black-and-white.
B&W
: Displays the viewfinder image in black-and-white.
Color
: Displays the viewfinder image in color.
Memo :
● The setting of this item is valid only in Camera mode. However, it becomes invalid in the AUX
mode (U model) and during display of return video, and the camera recorder operates in the
AColorB setting.
● When this item is set to AB & WB, only the captured images are displayed in black-and-white.
The status and menu screens are displayed in color.
LCD Mirror Mode
Mirror
Normal
For specifying the image display method when facing the LCD monitor. (A Page 28)
Mirror
: Displays image after laterally inverting it. (Mirror display)
Normal
: Displays image without laterally inverting it.
Memo :
● The setting of this item is valid only in Camera mode. However, it becomes invalid in the AUX
mode (U model) and during display of return video, and the camera recorder operates in the
ANormalB setting.
● During color bar and enlarged status displays, the AMirrorB setting is disabled.
(A Page 115 [Color Bar Output])
(A Page 19 [Enlarged Status Display on LCD Monitor])
88
Shooting Assist Item
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Focus Assist
Setting Values
ACCU-Focus
Normal
Color
Blue
Green
Red
Level
High
Middle
Low
Zebra
2Patterns
1Pattern
Top1
Bottom1
Top2
Function
For specifying the operation when the [FOCUS ASSIST] button on the camera recorder is
pressed. (A Page 37)
ACCU-Focus : Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU-Focus (forced focus) functions. The
depth of field of the object becomes shallower to enable easier focusing. The
ACCU-Focus function switches automatically to AOffB after about 10 seconds.
Normal
: Enables only the Focus Assist function. The focused area is displayed in color
to enable easier focusing. Display color can be specified with [Color].
For setting the display color of the focused area when Focus Assist is activated.
Blue
: Displays the focused area in blue.
Green
: Displays the focused area in green.
Red
: Displays the focused area in red.
For setting the display range of the focused area when Focus Assist is activated.
High
: Sets the display range wider than Middle.
Middle
: Sets the display range to standard.
Low
: Sets the display range narrower than Middle.
For selecting the number of zebra patterns to be displayed.
2Patterns
: Displays 2 types of zebra patterns (Zebra1 and Zebra2).
1Pattern
: Displays 1 type of zebra pattern (Zebra1).
Over,
100% to 85%,
80%,
75% to 5%
(In 5 % increments)
For setting the maximum luminance level for the AZebra1B display.
100% to 75%,
70%,
65% to 0%
(In 5 % increments)
For setting the minimum luminance level for the AZebra1B display.
Over,
100% to 5%
(In 5 % increments)
For setting the maximum luminance level for the AZebra2B display.
Memo :
● The Bottom1 value is automatically adjusted during setting of the Top1 value to ensure that a
Top1 > Bottom1 relationship is always maintained.
Memo :
● The Top1 value is automatically adjusted during setting of the Bottom1 value to ensure that a
Top1 > Bottom1 relationship is always maintained.
Memo :
● This item cannot be selected when [Zebra] is set to A1PatternB.
● The Bottom2 value is automatically adjusted during setting of the Top2 value to ensure that a
Top2 > Bottom2 relationship is always maintained.
Bottom2
Peaking
Frequency
100% to 85%,
80%,
75% to 0%
(In 5 % increments)
For setting the minimum luminance level for the AZebra2B display.
High
For setting the frequency range for applying contour enhancement using the [VF PEAKING]
adjustment knob or [LCD PEAKING +/-] button.
High
: Emphasizes the high frequency range.
Middle
: Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
Low
: Emphasizes the low frequency range.
Middle
Low
Memo :
● This item cannot be selected when [Zebra] is set to A1PatternB.
● The Top2 value is automatically adjusted during setting of the Bottom2 value to ensure that a
Top2 > Bottom2 relationship is always maintained.
89
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
LCD/VF Menu (continued)
Marker Setting Item
(A Page 112 [Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode Only, Excluding AUX Mode)])
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Aspect Ratio *1
Setting Values
Function
4:3, 14:9,
16:9,
For selecting the final image aspect ratio to be used from the overall angle of view.
16:9 (+4:3),
● When [Aspect Ratio] in the [Record Format] menu is set to A4:3B, this item is fixed at A4:3B
and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)
2.35:1 Center,
2.35:1C.HeadRM,
1.85:1 Center,
1.85:1C.HeadRM,
1.66:1, 1.75:1
Memo :
Aspect Marker *1
Line+Halftone
Halftone
Line
Off
For specifying how boundary markers are to be used to indicate the parts of an image that are
beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect Ratio].
Line+Halftone : Displays the boundary using lines, and areas outside the boundary in
halftone.
Halftone
: Displays areas outside the boundary in halftone.
Line
: Displays the boundary using lines.
Off
: Hides the boundary markers.
Safety Zone *1
95%, 93%, 90%,
88%, 80%,
For setting the percentage of area that is to be deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the
boundary of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect Ratio].
Off
Center Mark *1
On
Off
For specifying whether to display a mark to indicate the screen center within the aspect ratio
selected in [Aspect Ratio].
On
: Displays the center mark.
Off
: Hides the center mark.
*1: Regardless of the setting, the marker does not appear during Clip Review, return video display, and in the AUX mode (U model) and Media
mode.
Status Display Item
This menu is used to set the status displays on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.
Item
F.No/Iris Indicator
Setting Values
F.No+Iris Ind.
F.No
Off
Filter
On
Off
Video Format
On
Off
Media Remain
On
Off
90
Function
For specifying whether to display the iris position/iris level mark in the status display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screens.
F.No+Iris Ind. : Displays the iris position/level.
F.No
: Displays the iris position.
Off
: Hides the iris position/iris level mark.
For specifying whether to display the filter position in the status display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screens.
On
: Displays the filter position.
Off
: Hides the filter position.
For specifying whether to display the recording/playback video format in the status display on
the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.
On
: Displays the video format mode.
Off
: Hides the video format mode.
For specifying whether to display the remaining space of the recording SDHC card in the status
display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.
On
: Displays the remaining space on the SDHC card.
Off
: Hides the remaining space on the SDHC card. However, when the remaining space
warning is displayed, the information appears regardless of the setting.
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
TC/UB
Setting Values
On
Off
Audio Meter
On
Off
Battery Info
Time
Capacity%
Voltage
Function
For specifying whether to display the time code/user’s bit rate in the status display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screens.
On
: Displays the time code or user’s bit rate. Whether time code or user’s bit rate is
displayed is determined by the setting of the [TC DISPLAY] switch on the inner
panel of the camera recorder’s LCD monitor.
Off
: Hides the time code or user’s bit rate.
For specifying whether to display the audio level meter in the status display on the LCD monitor
and viewfinder screens.
On
: Displays the audio level meter.
Off
: Hides the audio level meter.
For setting the battery information to be displayed on the status screen when an AntonBauer or
IDX battery that supports communication is loaded.
The status screen is displayed on the LCD monitor and/or viewfinder.
The battery information appears only on the STATUS 1 screen in Camera mode. (A Page 104)
Time
: Displays the remaining battery power in minutes. AminB
Capacity% : Displays the remaining battery power in percentage. A%B
Voltage
: Displays the current battery voltage in units of 0.1 V. AVB
Memo :
● When a battery other than the one recommended (communication supported) is used,
AVoltageB may sometimes be displayed even when ATimeB or ACapacity%B is selected.
● When ATimeB or ACapacity%B is selected, the battery mark that appears before the value
changes according to the remaining battery power.
: 13 % - 29 %,
: 30 % - 59 %,
2: 60 % - 100 %
RES : 12 % and below,
● Display changes to A
RES B once the battery power falls below 12 %.
● When calibration of the battery is required, A
CAL B appears for 2 seconds after every 30
seconds of the voltage display.
● CALIBRATION is a state that requires renewal of the battery power information. The battery is
able to function as usual without calibration. However, calibration is recommended as correct
information of the remaining power and time cannot be obtained otherwise. For more details,
refer to the instruction manual of the battery.
● The remaining battery power and remaining time are intended as reference values for the
shooting duration.
● When an IDX battery is loaded while the camera recorder is connected to a KA-MR100G
(Memory Recorder), the ATimeB display setting may be disabled even when a recommended
battery (communication supported) is used.
Date Style
DMY (E model)
MDY (U model)
YMD
Time Style
24hour (E model)
12hour (U model)
Shutter Disp.
DEG
SEC
For setting the date display sequence in the status display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screens.
DMY
: Day/Month/Year
MDY
: Month/Day/Year
YMD
: Year/Month/Day
For setting the time display in the status display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.
24hour
: 24-hour display.
12hour
: 12-hour display. (AM/PM)
For setting the shutter display in the status display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.
DEG
: Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the same way as film cameras.
SEC
: Displays the shutter speed in seconds.
Memo :
● ADEGB is selectable only when [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to A24p (SP)B, A24p (HQ)B, A25p
(SP)B, or A25p (HQ)B. When [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to other values, the shutter display
setting is fixed at ASECB and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)
● When a Remote Control Unit is connected, the shutter display setting is fixed at ASECB
regardless of the [Frame & Bit Rate] setting.
91
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
A/V Out Menu
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Output Terminal
Setting Values
Composite
Component
Off
Set Up
7.5% (U model)
0.0% (E model)
Function
For setting output signals from the [Y/VIDEO]/[PB]/[PR] video signal output terminal (BNC) on
the side of the camera recorder.
Composite : Outputs composite signals to the [Y/VIDEO] video signal output terminal.
Component : Outputs component signals.
Off
: Signals are not output.
For selecting whether to add a setup signal to the video signal output from the [Y/VIDEO]/[PB]/
[PR] video signal output terminal (BNC) on the side of the camera recorder.
A setup signal can also be selected during signal input from the [IEEE1394] terminal.
7.5%
: Adds setup signal.
0.0%
: Setup signal is not added.
Memo :
● When [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to A50p (SP)B, A50p (HQ)B, A50i (SP)B, A50i (HQ)B, A25p
(SP)B, or A25p (HQ)B, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)
● Depending on the menu settings of the camera recorder and the condition of the cable
connected to it, the setup signal setting may be fixed at A0.0%B. A0.0%B is displayed in gray in
this case.
HD/SD-SDI Out
HD-SDI
SD-SDI
Off
For specifying whether to output SDI signals from the [HD/SD-SDI] output terminal on the side of
the camera recorder.
HD-SDI
: Outputs HD-SDI signals. Embedded (superimposed) audio signals and the time
code are also output.
SD-SDI
: Outputs SD-SDI signals down converted from HD. When [System Definition] in the
[Record Format] menu is set to AHD (MPEG2)B (A Page 75), SD-SDI signals
down converted from HD are output. Embedded (superimposed) audio signals and
the time code are also output.
Off
: SDI signals are not output.
Memo :
● When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is set to ASD (DV)B, AHD-SDIB cannot
be selected. Only SD-SDI signals are output. (A Page 75)
● When DV signals are input from the [IEEE1394] terminal, AHD-SDIB cannot be selected.
● User’s bit output from the [HD/SD-SDI] output terminal is used as a flag to determine valid
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will not be output.
Down Convert
Side Cut
Letter Box
Squeeze
For setting the style of displaying down-converted images on a 4:3 aspect ratio screen. This
setting applies to all Composite/SD-SDI/DV outputs.
Side Cut : Displays image with the left and right sides cut off.
Letter Box : Displays as a wide image with the top and bottom blackened.
Squeeze : Displays image that is squeezed horizontally.
Memo :
● When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is set to ASD (DV)B, this item appears
as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)
Analog Out Char.
On
Off
For selecting whether to display status and menu characters on the screen output from the
[Y/VIDEO]/[PB]/[PR] video signal output terminal (BNC) on the side of the camera recorder.
On
: Turns on display.
Off
: Turns off display.
Memo :
● When [Analog Out Char.] is set to AOnB, the details shown on the viewfinder are also
displayed in the image output from the video signal output terminal (BNC).
SDI Out Char.
On
Off
92
For selecting whether to display status and menu characters on the screen output from the
[HD/SD-SDI] output terminal on the side of the camera recorder.
On
: Turns on display.
Off
: Turns off display.
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Audio Monitor
Setting Values
Stereo
Function
For setting the audio sound of the [PHONES] terminal to stereo or mixed sound when the
[MONITOR SELECT] switch on the side of the camera recorder is set to ABothB.
Mix
: Outputs mixed sound (outputs mixed sound of CH-1 and CH-2 to both L and R).
Stereo : Outputs stereo sound (outputs audio sound of CH-1 to L, and CH-2 to R). When a
monitor speaker is used, only the audio sound of CH-1 is output.
Mix
䡵 [PHONES] terminal, speaker, and RCA outputs according to the combination of the camera
recorder’s [MONITOR SELECT] switch settings and [Audio Monitor] settings
[MONITOR SELECT]
Setting
[Audio Monitor]
Setting
[CH-1]
^
[BOTH]
[Mix]
[Stereo]
[CH-2]
^
Output from [PHONES]
Terminal
L
R
CH1
CH2
CH2
RCA Output
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1+CH2
CH1
Speaker
Output
CH1+CH2
CH1
CH2
Others Menu
Item
Setting Values
Function
Alarm Level
High
Middle
Low
Off
For selecting whether to turn on the alarm tone as well as setting the volume.
Alarm tone is output from the monitor speaker or [PHONES] terminal.
High
: Outputs alarm tone at a high volume level.
Middle
: Outputs alarm tone at a medium volume level.
Low
: Outputs alarm tone at a low volume level.
Off
: Alarm tone is not output.
Genlock Input
BNC
For selecting a destination to input video synchronizing signal.
BNC
: [GENLOCK/AUX IN] terminal at the side of the camera recorder.
Adapter
: Adapter connected to the accessory connection terminal (68 pin) at the back of
the camera recorder.
Adapter
Note :
● This item cannot be selected when the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB.
(U model)
^
Genlock Adjust...
For adjusting the H phase of the video signal of this camera recorder with respect to the
synchronizing signal input. (A Page 127)
Note :
● This item cannot be selected when the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB.
(U model)
Return Input
Adapter
Studio
For selecting a destination to input the return video.
Adapter
: Adapter connected to the accessory connection terminal (68 pin) at the back of
the camera recorder.
Studio
: Adapter connected to the [STUDIO] terminal at the side of the camera recorder.
Note :
● This item cannot be selected when the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB.
(U model)
Return Aspect
16:9
4:3
For selecting the aspect ratio of the return video.
16:9
: Select this setting when the return video is a squeeze signal.
4:3
: Select this setting when the return video is a 4:3 aspect signal
(including Letter Box).
Note :
● This item cannot be selected when the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB.
(U model)
93
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Others Menu (continued)
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Tally System
Setting Values
Studio
Ext
Int
Front Tally
On
Blink
Off
Back Tally
On
Blink
Off
1394 Rec Trigger
Ext
Series
Split
Synchronize
Off
Function
For setting the display conditions of the camera recorder’s tally lamps (front/back).
Studio : Displays according to the TALLY IN/PREVIEW IN signals from an external device,
such as a Remote Control Unit.
Ext
: Displays mainly the status of external devices.
Int
: Displays mainly the status of the camera recorder.
For specifying the illumination settings of the camera recorder’s front tally lamp during
recording.
On
: Lights up only during recording.
Blink : Blinks after the [REC] trigger button is pressed until recording starts, and lights up
during recording.
Off
: Turns off the tally lamp.
For specifying the illumination settings of the camera recorder’s back tally lamp during
recording.
On
: Lights up only during recording.
Blink : Blinks after the [REC] trigger button is pressed until recording starts, and lights up
during recording.
Off
: Turns off the tally lamp.
For setting the recording trigger for the external recording device connected to the
[IEEE1394] terminal.
Ext
: Outputs recording trigger to the external system only. (Recording is not
performed by the internal system.)
Series
: Outputs recording trigger to enable consecutive recording by the internal
and external systems.
Split
: Outputs separate recording triggers to the internal and external systems.
Synchronize : Outputs recording trigger simultaneously to the internal and external
systems.
Off
: Recording trigger is not output to the external system.
Memo :
● This item is selectable only in Camera mode. It cannot be set when recording is in
progress on the camera recorder or an external device.
● When the external recording device connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal switches to the
recording mode according to the settings, switching of operation mode using the
[CAM/MEDIA] button and the Clip Review function will be disabled.
● When [1394 Rec Trigger] is set to ASplitB, the [REC] button on the side of the camera
recorder becomes a Rec Start/Stop button for the external device. (A Page 12)
● When the [REC] button is pushed immediately after the power is turned on or after a
menu setting is changed, recording with the external device might start about 10 seconds
late.
1394 Auto Power
Off
Enable
Disable
For setting whether to automatically turn off the power of the external recording device
connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal when the [POWER] switch of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Enable : Turns off the power automatically.
Disable : Disables this function.
Memo :
● The IEEE1394 control is only valid for external devices with a POWER OFF button.
Mode LED
94
On
Off
For specifying the illumination settings of the operation mode indicator on the side control
panel of the camera recorder.
On
: Lights up as below according to the operation mode. (A Page 8)
Off
: Turns off the indicator.
Operation Mode
Color
Camera Mode
Blue/Purple
Media Mode (SD Card Mode)
Green
Media Mode (IEEE1394 Mode)
Orange
USB Mode
Orange
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Setting Values
^
Reset All
Function
Resets all menu settings.
Select [Reset All] in the AResetB menu and press the Set button (R). The message
AResetting...B appears. After the resetting process is complete, the message ACompleteB
appears for about 1 second. Reset will not be performed if [Cancel] is selected.
Memo :
● [Date/Time] (A Page 95) and [Time Zone] (A Page 95) cannot be reset.
● This item is not selectable when recording in Camera mode, during Clip Review, and in
Media mode.
^
Date/Time
For setting the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Memo :
● The display order of the date (year, month, and day) follows the [Date Style] setting in the
[Status Display] menu. However, the 24-hour format is used for the hour display
regardless of the [Time Style] setting. (A Page 91)
Time Zone
System
Information
Fan Hour
UTC-00:30 to UTC-12:00,
UTC,
UTC+14:00 to UTC+00:30
(In increments of 30
minutes)
For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30 minutes.
[Default values : UTC-05:00 (U model), UTC (E model)]
Memo :
● If [Date/Time] is already set, the [Date/Time] item is automatically adjusted when
[Time Zone] is altered.
For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.
Memo :
● Under normal environment, dust will accumulate on the internal fan when the camera recorder is used over a long
period. Dust may enter the camera recorder especially if it is used outdoors. This may affect the image and sound
quality of the camera recorder. Check and replace the fan after every 9000 hours (suggested guideline).
95
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Others Menu (continued)
Genlock Adjust Item
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Setting Values
Function
Analog SD H
Phase
Min, -27 to 0 to 81, Max
For adjusting the H phase of the SD analog signal of the camera recorder with respect to
the external synchronizing signal input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.
Increase value : Advances the H phase.
Decrease value : Delays the H phase.
Analog HD H
Phase
Min, -1023 to 0 to 1022,
Max
For adjusting the H phase of the HD analog signal of the camera recorder with respect to
the external synchronizing signal input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.
Increase value : Advances the H phase.
Decrease value : Delays the H phase.
Memo :
● When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is set to ASD (DV)B, this item
appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)
SD-SDI H Phase
Min, -372 to -1, 0, 1 to
372, Max
For adjusting the H phase of the SD-SDI signal of the camera recorder with respect to the
external synchronizing signal input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.
Increase value : Advances the H phase.
Decrease value : Delays the H phase.
Memo :
● When [HD/SD-SDI Out] in the [A/V Out] menu is set to a setting other than ASD (DV)B,
this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 92)
HD-SDI H Phase
Min, -1023 to 0 to 1022,
Max
For adjusting the H phase of the HD-SDI signal of the camera recorder with respect to the
external synchronizing signal input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.
Increase value : Advances the H phase.
Decrease value : Delays the H phase.
Memo :
● When [HD/SD-SDI Out] in the [A/V Out] menu is set to a setting other than AHD-SDIB,
this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 92)
Memo :
● You can alter the setting value in increments of 10 by pressing down the cross-shaped button (JK) for 2 seconds or longer.
(Excluding the [Analog SD H Phase] item)
96
Media Menu
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.
Item
Function
Format Media
For formatting (initializing) an SDHC card.
Select a card slot (A or B), select [Format] from [Cancel]/[Format], and press the Set button (R) to format (initialize) the
card. (A Page 33 [Formatting (Initializing) SDHC Cards])
Restore Media
For restoring an SDHC card.
Select a card slot (A or B), select [Restore] from [Cancel]/[Restore], and press the Set button (R) to restore the SDHC
card. (A Page 34 [Restoring the SDHC Card])
Memo :
● This item appears only when the SDHC card needs to be restored. However, it is not selectable when recording in
Camera mode and during Clip Review.
Setup File Manage Menu
Menu settings and button operations ([SHUTTER], [AE LEVEL], etc.) can be saved.
It is useful to save settings according to different shooting conditions.
Item
Setting Values
Function
Load File...
^
Loads the settings. (A Page 121)
Store File...
^
Saves the settings. (A Page 120)
Reset File...
^
Restores the saved settings to their default values. (A Page 121)
97
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Adding/Editing Frequently
Used Menu Items
(Favorites Menu)
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu
1 Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main Menu]
screen.
2 Select the menu or submenu item to add.
You can select and add/edit frequently used menu items freely
to create a personal menu screen (Favorites Menu).
Memo :
● [Favorites Menu] is valid only in Camera mode (except
AUX mode), and remains common even when the
recording format is changed.
● Up to 20 menu items can be added (two pages on the
screen).
● Added items in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset even
when [Reset All] in the main menu is executed.
[USER1] Button
[USER2] Button
[MENU] Button
Set Button (R)
Cross-shaped
Button
(JKH I)
Memo :
● Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be performed in
the following cases. [USER1 Add] is displayed in gray in
the operation guide.
● Selected item is already added to [Favorites Menu].
● Number of menu items that can be added (20 items) is
exceeded.
3 Press the [USER1] button.
A screen to confirm the addition appears.
[CANCEL] Button
[STATUS] Button
4 Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).
The selected menu item is added to [Favorites Menu].
4
Memo :
● Long descriptive names may be displayed for the menu
items in [Favorites Menu] to enable better understanding.
98
4 Press the [USER2] button.
Editing Favorites Menu
You can delete or change the order of the items added to
[Favorites Menu].
[Delete Mark] (
) appears at the beginning of the item.
Delete Mark
䡵 Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]
1 Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
A Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main Menu]
screen.
B Press the [STATUS] button to open the [Favorites Menu]
screen.
2 Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set button (R) or
crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing mode is activated.
Memo :
● When the [USER2] button is pressed again while the
menu item with [Delete Mark] (
) is selected,
[Delete Mark] (
) disappears.
5 Press the [USER1] button.
2
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu] editing mode
appears.
6 Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set button (R).
6
Header
(Magenta)
Memo :
3 Select the menu or submenu item to delete.
● Deletion is not complete until the changes are saved with
[Save & Exit].
● To exit the editing mode without deleting any items, select
[Exit without Saving].
● To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
3
99
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Adding/Editing Frequently
Used Menu Items (Favorites
Menu) (continued)
2
Editing Favorites Menu (continued)
䡵 Changing the Order of Items in
[Favorites Menu]
[USER1] Button
[USER2] Button
Header
(Magenta)
[MENU] Button
Set Button (R)
Cross-shaped
Button
(JKH I)
[CANCEL] Button
[STATUS] Button
1 Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
3 Select the menu or submenu item to move and press
the Set button (R).
The moving mode is activated and a position selection bar
for the move appears.
A Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main Menu]
screen.
B Press the [STATUS] button to open the [Favorites Menu]
screen.
2 Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set button (R) or
3
crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing mode is activated.
Position
Selection Bar
100
4 Select the position to move to with the cross-shaped
button (JK).
Move the position selection bar with the cross-shaped
button (JK) and select a position to move to.
5 Press the Set button (R).
The selected item moves to the new position.
4
5
6 Press the [USER1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu] editing mode
appears.
7 Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set button (R).
7
Memo :
● Moving is not complete until the changes are saved with
[Save & Exit].
● To exit the editing mode without saving any changes,
select [Exit without Saving].
● To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
101
Status Screen
Status Screen in Camera
Mode
STATUS 0 Screen
The STATUS 0 screen is not displayed in the AUX mode. (U model)
M
L
30/24 fps
DD
20 min
A 1min
B 1min
STBY
RES
F5.6
B C
A
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
SKIN AREA
S.DTL
B -3
A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
D
E
Appears only when connected to an external device.
K
J
I
H
G
F
Appears only when a warning is displayed. (A Page 104)
Item
A Media Status
Description
RECC : Clip Continuous recording (A Page 59)
No card found in the selected slot *
STBYC (displayed in yellow)
Recording standby (recording pause)
: Clip Continuous recording pause
Recording
(A Page 59)
Clip Review (A Page 56)
: Unable to record to the card in the slot
Pre Rec recording standby (A Page 58) STOP
POFF
: Power OFF
RECP : Pre Rec recording (A Page 58)
STBYC : Clip Continuous recording standby
(A Page 59)
---STBY
REC
REVIEW
STBYP
:
:
:
:
:
* When [Tally System] in the [Others] menu is set to AStudioB, A----B is not displayed even when a
card is not inserted into the slot. (A Page 94)
B Iris Status Mark
Indicates whether the brightness of the image is appropriate.
J
: Iris set higher than normal
R
: Iris set to normal
K
: Iris set lower than normal
C Iris F-Number
Displays F-number of the lens iris.
This is not displayed for some lens types, and when the lens cable is disconnected.
(OPEN, F2, F2.8, F4, F5.6, F8, F11, F16, CLOSE)
Memo :
● You can specify the type of display and whether to display the information using [F.No/Iris Indicator] of
[Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 90)
D AE Level
Appears when the AE function is activated and [AE LEVEL] in the [Camera Function] menu is set to a
value other than ANormalB. (A Page 78)
(AE-3, AE-2, AE-1, AE+1, AE+2, AE+3)
E Gain
Displays the gain value when it is not A0dBB.
(3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC)
F Shutter
Displays the current shutter speed when [Shutter] in the [Camera Function] menu is set to [Step]/
[Variable] and the shutter is ON. (A Page 78)
EEI
: Displayed when [Shutter] is set to AEEIB (auto adjustment mode).
FAS
: Displayed when shutter or gain is set to the auto adjustment mode.
Memo :
● The variable range of the shutter speed varies according to the video format settings. (A Page 41)
G White Balance Mode
102
Displays the current white balance mode.
A<**00K>, B<**00K>, P<**00K> (A**00B indicates color temperature)
FAW
: When the Fulltime Auto White balance mode is ON
MANU : Manual White Balance mode (only during control using the Remote Control Unit)
Item
Description
H Black Toe
Appears when [Black Toe] in the [Camera Process] menu is set to a value other than ANormalB.
(A Page 82)
B+1 to B+5 : Displays the AStretch LevelB when [Black Toe] is set to AStretchB (Level 1 to Level 5)
B-1 to B-5 : Displays the ACompress LevelB when [Black Toe] is set to ACompressB (Level 1 to Level 5)
No display : When [Black Toe] is set to ANormalB
I Skin Detail Operation
J Operation of Functions
Appears as AS.DTLB when the Skin Detail function is turned ON.
K Luminance Information
Appears when the Spot Meter function is activated. For details of the display, refer to [Setting Spot Meter]
(A Page 55).
MAX : Maximum luminance
MIN
: Minimum luminance
L Event/Warning Display
Displays the settings for about 3 seconds when the gain or shutter speed is manually changed.
For other messages displayed in this area, refer to [Error Displays and Actions] (A Page 134).
Area
SKIN AREA
FOCUS
: Blinks when the Skin Area display is ON.
: Appears when the Focus Assist function is activated. When AACCU-FocusB is enabled,
AACCU-FOCUSB blinks for about 10 seconds while Focus Assist starts up, after which
the AFOCUSB indicator lights up. When [ACCU-Focus] is operating, it is forcibly turned
OFF after recording starts. (A Page 89)
Displayed Content
Setting Status
GAIN **dB (** : 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18)
Gain value is altered
GAIN ALC
Gain is set to AALCB
FULL AUTO ON, FULL AUTO OFF
[FULL AUTO] is turned AON/OFFB
ZEBRA ON, ZEBRA OFF
[Zebra] is turned AON/OFFB
FOCUS ASSIST ON, FOCUS ASSIST OFF
[Focus Assist] is turned AON/OFFB
SHUTTER **
Shutter speed is altered *1
(****K : 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/
25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/
250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000)
V. SHUTTER **** (**** : 1/24.01 to 1/1998.0)
Variable shutter speed is altered *1
SHUTTER OFF **
(**** is the standard shutter value in the respective
modes.)
Shutter is turned AOFFB *1
WHITE BAL * <****K>
(* : A, B, PRESET)
(****, K indicates color temperature)
White balance value is altered
WHITE BAL FAW
FAW (Fulltime Auto White balance) is activated
FILTER ****
(** : OFF,1/4ND,1/16ND)
[ND FILTER] setting is altered
AE LEVEL **
(**** : -3, -2, -1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3)
[AE LEVEL] value is altered
SPOT METER ****
(**** : ON, FIXED, OFF, SELECT)
Spot meter status is changed
(A Page 55)
BLACK NORMAL
[Black Toe] is set to ANormalB
BLACK STRETCH * (* : 1,2,3,4,5,)
[Stretch Level] of [Black Toe] is altered
BLACK COMPRESS * (* : 1,2,3,4,5,)
[Compress Level] of [Black Toe] is altered
REC SWITCH LOCKED, REC SWITCH UNLOCKED
Record button lock switch is turned ON/OFF in
Camera mode, or [REC] switch on the handle of
the camera recorder is pressed while being
locked
SLOT SWITCHED * (* : A, B)
Active SDHC slot is switched automatically or
using the [SLOT SELECT] button in Camera
mode.
TRIGGER TO EXT
Recording command is sent out from the
[IEEE1394] terminal
FRAME RATE rrrr/pp fps
(rrrr : recording frame rate, pp : playback frame rate)
Variable frame rate is adjusted using the crossshaped button
OK MARK ADDED, OK MARK DELETED
OK mark is added or deleted
(A Page 68)
Other Displays (A Page 134 [Error Displays and Actions])
M Frame Rate
*1
Appears as xx/yy fps (xx: recording frame rate, yy: playback frame rate) only when AVariable FrameB is set
in the [Rec Mode] menu. (A Page 76)
: The variable range of the shutter speed varies according to the video format settings. (A Page 41)
103
Status Screen
Status Screen in Camera
Mode (continued)
STATUS 1 Screen
A
B
C
D
1280x720 30/24 fps
60p HQ
OK
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
282min
E
*0
00:00:00:00
DD
20 min
F5.6
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
SKIN AREA
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
AE+1 9dB 1/10000
F
K
J
I
H
* 0 : Same as STATUS 0 Screen (A Page 102)
*0
G
Item
Description
A Resolution
Displays the video image resolution.
(1920⳯1080, 1440⳯1080, 1280⳯720, 720⳯480, 720⳯576)
B Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
(60p HQ, 30p HQ, 60i HQ, 60p SP, 30p SP, 60i SP, 50p HQ, 25p HQ, 50i HQ, 50p SP, 25p SP, 50i SP, 24p HQ,
24p SP, 50i, 60i)
Memo :
● Displayed as A60i AUXB in the external input recording mode. (U model)
C OK Mark
D Remaining Space on
Media
Appears when an OK mark is added. (A Page 68)
Displays the remaining recording time of the SDHC cards in Slot A and Slot B separately.
Memo :
● Only warnings are displayed in the STATUS 0 and STATUS 4 screens. (When the total remaining time for the
SDHC cards in slot A and slot B is less than 3 minutes)
A
A!
A
E Voltage/Battery
Power
: Currently selected slot. (White card)
: SDHC card requires restoring or formatting, or SDHC card is not supported (not of Class 6/10 type).
: Write-protect switch of SDHC card is set.
Displays the current status of the power supply in use.
Display
Description
12.3V
Currently powered by an AC adapter. The current voltage is shown on the right.
If the supplied voltage from the AC adapter is low, the voltage value will be
displayed in red as a warning.
12.3V
200min
30%
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out, the battery mark appears hollow, and ARESB is
displayed.
The display on the right can be set using [Battery Info] of [Status Display] in the
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)
RES
F Audio Level Meter
-20 dB
-10 dB
Displays the audio level for CH-1 and CH-2.
When [Rec Mode] in the [Rec Mode] menu is set to AVariable FrameB, audio cannot
be recorded and is indicated by the
mark.
The positions of -20 dB and -10 dB are displayed as AoB.
Memo :
● You can turn ON/OFF the display using [Audio Meter] of [Status Display] in the
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)
104
Item
G ND Filter Position
Description
Displays the current ND filter position.
No display : [ND FILTER] is set to AOFFB
ND1/4
: [ND FILTER] is set to A1/4B
ND1/16
: [ND FILTER] is set to A1/16B
Memo :
● You can turn ON/OFF the display using [Filter] of [Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu.
(A Page 90)
H Remaining Space on
External Device
Displays the remaining recording time of the external device (0 to 999). When the remaining time is running out,
this is indicated in red (value + unit of measurement) as a warning to the user.
Memo :
● Only warnings are displayed in the STATUS 0 and STATUS 4 screens.
I Operation of External Displays the operating status of the connected external device. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
Device
corresponding external device.
Memo :
● Only warnings are displayed in the STATUS 0 and STATUS 4 screens.
J Time Code (TC)/
User’s Bit (UB)
Displays the time code (hour : minute : second : frame) or user’s bit data.
Example :
Time Code:
00:00:00:00
User’s Bit :
F F EE D D 2 0
Colon (:) for non-drop frames
Dot (.) for drop frames
Memo :
● You can turn ON/OFF the display using [TC/UB] of [Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu.
(A Page 91)
● You can select whether to display the time code or user’s bit using the [TC DISPLAY] switch on the inner panel of
the LCD monitor.
K Synchronization with This item is valid when [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to AExternalB.
External Time Code
Generator
Lights up
: When the built-in time code generator is synchronized with the time code that is input to the
[TC IN] terminal.
Light goes out : When the signal is not synchronized, or when there is no time code input to the [TC IN]
terminal.
105
Status Screen
Status Screen in Camera
Mode (continued)
STATUS 2 Screen
CAMERA INFORMATION
SETUP FILE
ZEBRA1
ZEBRA2
AUDIO
FORMAT
MEDIA
STBY
*0
282min
G
F
SCENE
[ SCENE
]
50%-100%
70%-80%
CH1
CH2
QuickTime
A 125min
B123min
E
D
C
B
Jan 2. 2009 01:23:45AM
*1
A
* 0 : Same as STATUS 0 Screen (A Page 102)
* 1 : Same as STATUS 1 Screen (A Page 104)
Item
A Date/Time
Description
Displays the current date and time.
Note :
● The date/time display style can be specified in [LCD/VF] menu B [Status Display] B [Date Style]/[Time
Style]. (A Page 91)
B Remaining Space on
MEDIA
Displays the remaining recording time of the SDHC cards in slot A and slot B separately.
A
: Currently selected slot. (White card)
: SDHC card requires restoring or formatting, or SDHC card is not supported (not of Class 6/10
A!
type).
: Write-protect switch of SDHC card is set.
A
C FORMAT
Displays the file format for recording to the SDHC card (File Format) that is specified at [File Format] in
the [Record Format] menu. (A Page 75)
D AUDIO
E ZEBRA1/ZEBRA2 Values
Displays the status of the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch. (A: AAUTOB/M: AMANUALB)
Displays the settings from ABottom1B to ATop1B specified at [Zebra], and the settings from ABottom2B to
ATop2B specified at [Zebra]. (A Page 89)
Memo :
● When [Zebra] in the menu is set to A1PatternB, ZEBRA2 appears as A---B. (A Page 89)
F Subname of Setup File
Displays the subname of the setup file.
Memo :
● ARB appears at the beginning when changes are made to the loaded file. (A Page 119)
G SETUP FILE
106
Displays the type of the loaded file. (SCENE/PICTURE)
STATUS 3 Screen
This screen displays a list of the functions assigned to the switches.
* 1 : (Appears only during warnings)
SWITCH ASSIGN
FAW
NONE
GAIN [ L / M / H ] 0dB / 9dB / 12dB
USER 1
BARS
USER 2
B.STRETCH3
USER 3
LOAD FILE
RET
CLIP REVIEW
SKIN/SPOT
SPOT METER
A 1min
AE LEVEL
AE LEVEL/VFR
B 1min
Jan 2. 2008 01:23:45AM
STBY
282min
*0
*1
A
B
C
D
E
F
* 0 : Same as STATUS 0 Screen (A Page 102)
* 1 : Same as STATUS 1 Screen (A Page 104)
* 2 : Same as STATUS 2 Screen (A Page 106)
*2
Item
A [FAW] Function
Assignment
Description
Displays the position of the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch that is assigned with the FAW function.
(NONE, A, B, PRESET)
B [GAIN] Switch Settings
Displays the setting values for each of the positions ([L]/[M]/[H]) on the [GAIN] switch.
(0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC)
C [USER1,USER2,USER3]
Displays the setting status of the [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3] buttons.
(NONE, BARS, B.STRETCH*, B.COMPRESS*, RET, LOAD FILE)
* indicates 1 to 5
Button Function Settings
D [RET] Button Function
Settings
E [SKIN AREA/SPOT
METER] Switch Settings
Displays the setting status of the [RET] button on the lens.
(CLIP REVIEW, RETURN, FOCUS ASSIST, OK MARK)
Displays the setting status of the [SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch.
(SKIN AREA, SPOT METER)
F Cross-Shaped Button (H I) Displays the functions assigned to the left/right (H I) of the cross-shaped button.
Function Assignment
(DISABLE, AE LEVEL, AE LEVEL/VFR)
STATUS 4 Screen
This screen displays the event. It is also used to display warnings only.
*0
30/24 fps
DD
20 min
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
A 1min
B 1min
STBY
*0
Appears only when connected to an external device (A Page 104)
*0
RES
* 1 (Appears only during warnings)
* 0 : Same as STATUS 0 Screen (A Page 102)
* 1 : Same as STATUS 1 Screen (A Page 104)
107
Status Screen
Status Screen in SD Card
Mode
These are the status screens displayed in Media mode (SD Card mode, Media mode).
STATUS 0 Screen
This screen displays the media status or event. It is also used to display warnings only.
STATUS 1 and STATUS 2 Screens
F
A B C DE
F
A B C DE
OK
OK
J
I
H
G
STATUS 1 Screen
K
J
I
H
G
STATUS 2 Screen
Item
Description
A OK Mark
B Resolution
Appears when an OK mark is added. (A Page 68)
C Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
(60p HQ, 30p HQ, 60i HQ, 60p SP, 30p SP, 60i SP, 50p HQ, 25p HQ, 50i HQ, 50p SP, 25p SP, 50i SP, 24p
HQ, 24p SP, 50i, 60i)
D Media
Displays the media slot (A or B) of the currently played clip.
A key mark appears when the write-protect switch of the SDHC card is set.
E Clip Information
F Time Code (TC)/
Displays current clip number/total number of clips.
User’s Bit (UB)
Displays the video image resolution.
(1920⳯1080, 1440⳯1080, 1280⳯720, 720⳯480, 720⳯576)
Displays the time code (hour : minute : second : frame) or user’s bit data.
TC
: Time code
UB
: User’s bit
The framing mode display for the time code is as follows.
00:00:00:00
Colon (:) for non-drop frames
Dot (.) for drop frames
Memo :
● You can turn ON/OFF the display using [TC/UB] of [Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu.
(A Page 91)
● You can select whether to display the time code or user’s bit using the [TC DISPLAY] switch on the inner
panel of the LCD monitor.
G Date/Time
Displays the date/time that is recorded on the currently played SDHC card.
Note :
● The date/time display style can be specified in [LCD/VF] menu B [Status Display] B [Date Style]/
[Time Style]. (A Page 91)
108
Item
Description
H Audio Level Meter
-20 dB
-10 dB
Displays the audio level for CH-1 and CH-2.
The positions of -20 dB and -10 dB are displayed as AoB.
Memo :
● You can turn ON/OFF the display using [Audio Meter] of [Status Display] in the
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)
I Voltage/
Displays the current status of the power supply in use.
Battery Power
Display
12.3V
12.3V
200min
30%
RES
Description
Currently powered by an AC adapter. The current voltage is shown on the right.
If the supplied voltage from the AC adapter is low, the voltage value will be
displayed in red as a warning.
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out, the battery mark appears hollow, and ARESB is
displayed.
Memo :
● The display on the right can be set using [Battery Info] of [Status Display] in the
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)
J Media Status
PLAY
STILL
FWD *
REV *
STOP
POFF
K Operation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation buttons.
:
:
:
:
:
:
Playing
Still picture playback mode
High-speed playback in the forward direction (* playback speed: 5x or 15x)
High-speed playback in the reverse direction (* reverse playback speed: 5x or 15x)
Stop mode
Power OFF
Status Screen in IEEE1394
Input Mode
These are the status screens displayed in Media mode (IEEE1394 Input mode).
STATUS 1 Screen
[Event/Warning Display Area] (A Page 103)
RES
* Appears only when a warning is displayed. [Voltage/Remaining Battery Power] (A Page 110)
STATUS 2 Screen
B
A
[Event/Warning Display Area] (A Page 103)
1280x720
24p HQ
282min
D
C
109
Status Screen
Status Screen in IEEE1394
Input Mode (continued)
Item
Description
A Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs. (60p HQ, 30p HQ, 60i HQ, 60p SP, 30p SP, 60i SP, 50p HQ, 25p
HQ, 50i HQ, 50p SP, 25p SP, 50i SP, 24p HQ, 24p SP, 50i, 60i)
B Resolution
C Audio Level Meter
Displays the video image resolution. (1920⳯1080, 1440⳯1080, 1280⳯720, 720⳯480, 720⳯576)
-10 dB
-20 dB
Displays the audio level for CH-1 and CH-2.
A
mark is displayed when the audio format is not supported in the IEEE1394
mode. (32k, 44.1k)
The positions of -20 dB and -10 dB are displayed as AoB.
Memo :
● You can turn ON/OFF the display using [Audio Meter] of [Status Display] in the
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)
D Voltage/Remaining
Displays the current status of the power supply in use.
Battery Power
Display
Description
Currently powered by an AC adapter. The current voltage is shown on the right.
If the supplied voltage from the AC adapter is low, the voltage value will be
displayed in red as a warning.
12.3V
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out, the battery mark appears hollow, and ARESB is
displayed.
12.3V
200min
30%
Memo :
● The display on the right can be set using [Battery Info] of [Status Display] in the
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)
RES
Enlarged Status Display on
LCD Monitor
You can enlarge and display only the characters of the status screen on the LCD monitor.
A
CH1
CH2
B
C
D
DF
FREE
STBY
J
A
DD
1280 x 720
min 60p HQ
100min
67.8min
B 123 min OK
E
F G
STBY
STOP
REC
REVIEW
H
Item
A Audio Level Meter
I
Description
Displays the audio levels of [CH-1] and [CH-2].
If the reference audio level (A-20dBB or A-12dBB) is exceeded, this is displayed in yellow. The AOverB area is
displayed in red. A48kB is the sampling frequency.
Memo :
● When [Rec Mode] in the [Rec Mode] menu is set to AVariable FrameB, audio cannot be recorded and is
indicated by the
mark.
B Framing Mode
110
Displays the framing mode.
[DF]
: Drop frame
[NDF] : Non-drop frame
Item
Description
C Time Code Generator Displays the operation mode of the time code. (Display: [FREE], [RECR], [REGN], [EXT], [EXT L]) (A Page 48)
This item appears as AEXTB when [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to AExternalB.
L indicates the synchronizing status of the built-in time code generator with respect to the time code that is
input to the [TC IN] terminal.
Lights up
: During synchronization with the external time code.
Light goes out : When the signal is not synchronized, or when there is no time code input.
D Media Status
Displays the SDHC card status in characters and symbols.
---STBY
REC
REVIEW
STBYP
RECP
STBYC
E Remaining Space on
Media
F OK Mark
G Video Format
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
No card found in the selected slot
Recording standby (recording pause)
Recording
Clip Review (A Page 56)
Pre Rec recording standby (A Page 58)
Pre Rec recording (A Page 58)
Clip Continuous recording standby
(A Page 59)
RECC : Clip Continuous recording (A Page 59)
STBYC (displayed in yellow)
: Clip Continuous recording pause
(A Page 59)
STOP
: Unable to record to the card in the slot
POFF
: Power OFF
Displays the remaining recording time on the SDHC card. The currently active slot is indicated using an
enlarged card icon with black characters and a white background. A key mark appears when the write-protect
switch of the SDHC card is set.
Appears as [OK] when the currently played clip is appended with an OK mark.
Displays the video format that is set. (A Page 38)
Memo :
● Displayed as A60i AUXB in the external input recording mode. (U model)
H Voltage/
Battery Power
Displays the current status of the power supply in use.
Display
12.3V
12.3V
200min
30%
RES
Description
Currently powered by an AC adapter. The current voltage is shown on the right.
If the supplied voltage from the AC adapter is low, the voltage value will be displayed in
red as a warning.
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out, the battery mark appears hollow, and ARESB is displayed.
Memo :
● The display on the right can be set using [Battery Info] of [Status Display] in the
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)
I Operation of External Displays the operating status of the connected external device.
Device
J Time Code (TC)/
User’s Bit (UB)
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding external device.
Displays the time code (hour : minute : second : frame) or user’s bit data.
00:00:00:00
Colon (:) for non-drop frames
Dot (.) for drop frames
Memo :
● During enlarged display of the status on the LCD monitor screen, the video image remains displayed on the viewfinder.
111
Camera Features
Marker and Safety Zone
Displays (Camera Mode
Only, Excluding AUX Mode)
The marker and safety zone displays are useful in helping you determine the angle of view for the image according to the
shooting purpose.
䡵 Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B, [Aspect Marker] = ALine+HalftoneB, and [Center Mark] = AOnB
Center Mark
Safety Zone
Aspect Marker
You can turn ON/OFF the safety zone and center mark displays as shown below using the [Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone] and
[Center Mark] settings of [Marker Setting] in the [LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 90)
[Aspect Marker] Display
䡵 When [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B
[Line]
[Halftone]
[Line+Halftone]
[Aspect Marker] Display for Different
[Aspect Ratio] Settings
䡵 When [Aspect Marker] = AHalftoneB
[4:3]
[14:9]
[16:9]/[16:9 (+4:3)]
[2.35:1 Center]
[1.85:1 Center]
[1.85:1C.HeadRM]
[1.66:1]
[1.75:1]
112
[2.35:1C.HeadRM]
[Safety Zone] Display
䡵 When [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B, [Aspect Marker] = AHalftoneB, and [Center Mark] = AOnB
[Off]
[95%]
[93%]
[90%]
[88%]
[80%]
[Center Mark] Display
䡵 When [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B, [Aspect Marker] = AHalftoneB, and [Safety Zone] = A80%B
[Off]
[On]
䡵 When [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B, [Aspect Marker] = AHalftoneB, and [Safety Zone] = AOffB
[Off]
[On]
113
Camera Features
Smoothening the Skin Color
(Skin Detail Function)
The Skin Detail function can be used to reduce the contour
enhancement of video signals for only the skin areas so as to
produce a smoother skin tone.
䡵 Color Range Setting
1 Place the cursor at [Skin Color Range] with the crossshaped button (JK).
2 Press the Set button (R) or cross-shaped button (I) to
move the cursor to a setting value.
Preparations Before Using the Skin Detail
Function (Skin Adjust Function)
1 Adjust the white balance. (A
2
Page 42)
2 Display the [Skin Color Adjust] screen. (A
Page 84)
● Select [Main Menu] screen B [Camera Process] menu B
[Detail]/[Adjust] B [Skin Color Adjust], and press the Set
button (R).
● The entire image switches to black-and-white display,
leaving only the detected skin areas in color.
3 Select a setting value using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
Select a setting within the [Narrow, -1 to -9, Normal, 9 to 1,
Wide] range.
4 Place the cursor at [Back] after setting is complete,
and press the Set button (R).
Skin Color
Detection Frame
The data is saved, and the screen returns to the [Detail]
menu.
Using the Skin Detail Function
Memo :
● The displays for [Bars], [Zebra] and [Focus Assist] are
temporarily set to AOffB, while the [B & W] display in
[VF Display] temporarily switches to AColorB.
䡵 Hue Range Detection
1 Set [Skin Detect] to AOnB. (A
● Select [Main Menu] screen B [Camera Process] menu B
[Detail]/[Adjust] B [Skin Detect] and set to AOnB.
● AS.DTLB appears on the STATUS 0 and 1 screens of the
LCD monitor and viewfinder when the Skin Detail function
is activated.
AS.DTLB appears
1 Project the detected object inside the skin color
detection frame.
2 Place the cursor at [Skin Color Detect] with the
cross-shaped button (JK).
1280x720 30/24 fps
24p HQ
OK
Memo :
● AErrorB is displayed if the object inside the frame is not
within the preset color range.
4 Press the Set button (R) after the desired hue range is
detected.
● If no AErrorB is displayed, the data is saved and the process
ends.
● If AErrorB appears, the process ends without saving the data.
5 Place the cursor at [Back] after the hue range is
detected, and press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [Detail] menu screen.
114
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
00:00:00:00
MAX 123%
MIN 45%
SKIN AREA
S.DTL
B -3
ND1/16 A<3200K>
3 Press the Set button (R).
Display switches from AStopB to AExecuteB, and detection
starts.
Page 84)
282min
STATUS 1 Screen
2 Set the adjustment level for the contour enhancement
of the skin tone. (A Page 84)
Set using [Main Menu] screen B [Camera Process] menu B
[Detail]/[Adjust] B [Skin Color Detect]/[Level].
Checking the Preset Hue Area
1 Set the [ZEBRA ON/OFF] switch at the front of the
camera recorder to the [SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] end.
Doing so forcibly turns ON the Skin Adjust function
temporarily, and the preset hue area is displayed in color on
the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Color Bar Output
Multi-format color bars can be output on this camera
recorder.
[USER1,USER2,USER3]
Buttons
[FULL AUTO]
Switch
[ZEBRA ON/OFF]
Switch
Memo :
● When [Color Gain] in the [Camera Process] menu is set to
AOffB, only the area where Skin Detail is functioning is
displayed in skin tone. (A Page 83)
● When [SKIN A./SPOT M.] of [Switch Set] in the
[Camera Function] menu screen is set to ASpot MeterB,
the hue area cannot be checked using the
[SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch. (A Page 80)
Setting
To output color bars, follow the setting procedure below.
1 Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to AOFFB.
2 Set [Bars] in the [Camera Function] menu to AOnB.
(A Page 78)
Color bars are output.
Color Bar Output Using the USER Buttons
1 Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to AOFFB.
2 Assign ABarsB to any one of the [USER1]/[USER2]/
[USER3] buttons.
Set using [USER1]/[USER2]/[USER3] of [Switch Set] in the
[Camera Function] menu. (A Page 79)
3 Press the corresponding [USER1]/[USER2]/
[USER3] button that is assigned with ABarsB.
Color bars are output.
Memo :
● During color bar output, you can select whether to output
the reference audio signals using [Test Tone] in the
[Audio Set] menu. (A Page 77)
● When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to AONB and [Bars]
in the [FULL AUTO] menu is set to AOffB, color bars are
not output in the AUX and Media modes.
115
Camera Features
Color Matrix Adjustment
R&Yl R Level
R
I
Increase the value:
Corrected Y increases
Mg
YI
B
The color matrix of the camera recorder can be adjusted to a
color of the user’s preference.
When shooting is performed using multiple cameras, the
colors of the different cameras can be adjusted, and a color
of the user’s preference can be set on this camera recorder.
13 saturation parameters and 3 hue parameters are available
for adjustment. Adjust the color on the vector scope and
waveform monitor using the color chart.
* The adjusted values of AStandardB, ACinema VividB, and
ACinema SubduedB in [Color Matrix] can be stored
individually. (A Page 83)
G
Cy
R&Yl Yl Level
R
I
Increase the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Mg
YI
B
G
R
I
Increase the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Mg
YI
menu. (A Page 86)
B
2 Adjust the saturation.
G
● Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to select a value.
● The correction range (gray area in the chart below) for each
of the 12 levels from [Mg&R Mg Level] to [B&Mg Mg Level]
changes in the direction indicated by the arrow on the vector
scope.
Yl&G G Level
Increase the value:
Corrected Y increases
Mg
YI
B
G
G&Cy G Level
Cross-Shaped Button
(JK)
Increase the value:
Corrected Y increases
Mg
YI
B
G
G&Cy Cy Level
Increase the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Mg
YI
B
Memo :
● In addition to the vector, the luminance Y level of the
correction range changes as well.
G
Cy&B Cy Level
R
I
Increase the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Mg
B
G
Mg&R R Level
R
I
YI
Increase the value:
Corrected Y increases
Mg
Cy
G
Cy&B B Level
B
G
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y increases
Cy
YI
116
Increase the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Mg
B
YI
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Increase the value:
Corrected Y increases
Mg
YI
B
G
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y increases
Cy
R
I
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y increases
Cy
R
I
Mg&R Mg Level
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Cy
R
I
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Cy
R
I
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y increases
Cy
R
I
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y increases
Cy
Yl&G Yl Level
1 Select [Color Matrix] or [Adjust] in the [Camera Process]
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Cy
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y decreases
B&Mg B Level
R
I
Increase the value:
Corrected Y increases
Mg
YI
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y decreases
B
G
Cy
4 Adjust the hue.
Adjust the hue based on the R-, G-, and B-axes.
As illustrated in the chart below, increasing the value rotates
the hue in the anti-clockwise direction on the vector scope,
with the respective axes as the center. Decreasing the value
rotates the hue in the clockwise direction.
R Rotation
B&Mg Mg Level
R
I
Increase the value:
Corrected Y decreases
Mg
R
I
Increase the value:
Hue rotates in the anticlockwise direction with
R-axis as the center.
Mg
YI
YI
Decrease the value:
Corrected Y increases
B
G
B
G
Cy
G Rotation
3 Adjust Yl&G Mask Range.
R
I
Adjusting [Yl&G Yl Level] and [Yl&G G Level] may also affect
the I-axis (color close to the skin tone). When [Yl&G Yl Level]
is increased, the skin tone becomes slightly more yellowish.
On the other hand, when [Yl&G G Level] is increased, the
skin tone becomes slightly more greenish.
Adjust [Yl&G Mask Range] if you want to increase YI&G
toward yellow and green without affecting the skin tone. As
illustrated in the chart below, [Yl&G Mask Range] adjusts the
gray area from the R-axis, which disables the [Yl&G Yl Level]
and [Yl&G G Level] adjustments.
Increasing the [Yl&G Mask Range] value widens the
masking range. By doing so, the effect on the I-axis (color
close to the skin tone) due to adjustments of [Yl&G Yl Level]
and [Yl&G G Level] is reduced. However, this also reduces
the amount of correction by [Yl&G Yl Level] and
[Yl&G G Level].
Cy
Increase the value:
Hue rotates in the anticlockwise direction with
G-axis as the center.
Mg
YI
B
G
B Rotation
Cy
R
I
Increase the value:
Hue rotates in the anticlockwise direction with
B-axis as the center.
Mg
YI
B
G
Cy
Yl&G Mask Range
R
I
Mg
YI
B
G
Cy
[Yl&G Yl Level] and [Yl&G G Level]
adjustment
117
Camera Features
Reproduction of Dark Areas
(Black Stretch/Compress
Function)
Process the dark areas according to the balance of bright
and dark areas in the image to adjust the overall balance of
contrast.
1 Adjust [Black Toe] in the [Camera Process] menu
according to the captured video signals.
2 Set the luminance point (Point Level) for AStretchB or
ACompressB.
● Decide the luminance point (Point Level) at which the dark
areas in the image are to be stretched or compressed.
● The luminance point (Point Level) can be set within the
range of A5% to 15%B.
3 Adjust the amount of AStretchB or ACompressB.
● Set the amount to stretch or compress the dark areas in
the image using [Stretch Level] or [Compress Level].
● The amount of stretch or compression increases when a
larger value is specified.
䡵 Example
To increase the area of 10 % level (Point A in the figure
below) in the image under normal condition ([Black Toe] is
ANormalB)
A Set [Black Toe] to AStretchB.
B Set [Point Level] to A10%B.
C Set the amount to increase using [Stretch Level] (ALevel
1 to Level 5B).
The reproduction of dark areas improves as the 10 % level
point A stretches toward point B. (See figure below)
OUTPUT
When [Black Toe] is
AStretchB
B
When [Black Toe] is
ANormalB
Increasing the A10%B area
A
[Point Level] set at A10%B
0
0
INPUT
5%
118
10%
15%
Configuring Setup Files
The menu settings can be stored on the camera recorder or
an SDHC card by saving them as a setup file.
Loading a saved setup file enables you to reproduce the
appropriate setup state speedily.
Two types of setup files are available.
䡵 Scene file:
File that contains all menu settings, ranging from video
format settings to image creation settings such as device
settings and shooting conditions, as well as the contents of
the [Favorites Menu].
䡵 Picture file:
File that contains image creation settings in accordance to
the shooting conditions ([Camera Process] menu items).
(A Page 82)
Make use of the [Setup File Manage] menu to save or load a
setup file.
The following operations can be performed on the [Setup File
Manage] menu.
䢇 Saving setup files (A Page 120)
䢇 Loading a setup file (A Page 121)
䡵 Number of Storable Setup Files
Camera recorder
SDHC Card
Slot A
Slot B
: [CAM1] ~ [CAM4]
: A[EXT1] ~ A[EXT8]
: B[EXT1] ~ B[EXT8]
䡵 Preset Setup Files
As described below, there are three types of scene files and
two types of picture files that can be loaded according to
different shooting conditions.
Scene file
[GY-HD 60p LIKE]
: Setting is adjusted according to the
tone of the GY-HD series.
[Camera Resolution] is set to
A1280x720B, and [Frame & Bit Rate]
is set to A60p (HQ)B.
[GY-HD 50p LIKE] : Setting is adjusted according to the
tone of the GY-HD series.
[Camera Resolution] is set to
A1280x720B, and [Frame & Bit Rate]
is set to A50p (HQ)B.
[CINEMA 1080/24p] : Setting that is suited for movie-like
video shooting.
[Camera Resolution] is set to
A1920x1080B, and [Frame & Bit Rate]
is set to A24p (HQ)B.
Picture file
[GY-HD LIKE]
䢇 Resetting a saved file (A Page 121)
[CINEMA]
: Setting is adjusted according to the
tone of the GY-HD series.
: Setting that is suited for movie-like
video shooting.
Memo :
● The above setup files are used exclusively for loading. They
cannot be overwritten or reset.
䡵 Compatibility
Scene file
● Scene files saved using the GY-HM700 series cannot be
loaded using this camera recorder.
● Scene files saved using this camera recorder cannot be
loaded using the GY-HM700 series.
Picture file
● Picture files saved using the GY-HM700 series can be
loaded using this camera recorder. When the
[Alternative Temp.] setting is not available on the
GY-HM700 series, it is set to the default value.
● JVC does not provide guarantee that picture files saved
using this camera recorder can be loaded using the
GY-HM700 series.
119
Camera Features
Configuring Setup Files
(continued)
䡵 Operating instructions of software keyboard (A Page 71)
A
B
Saving Setup Files
1 Display the [Setup File Manage] menu.
Select the [Setup File Manage] menu on the [Main Menu]
screen, and press the Set button (R). (A Page 97)
2 Select [Store File] and press the Set button (R).
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and press the Set
button (R).
F
C
G
H
D
E
Memo :
The existing files are displayed.
4 Select the file to be newly saved (or overwritten)
using the cross-shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
Cursor
● When overwriting an existing file, the subname of the
existing file is displayed.
● Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or press the
[CANCEL] button to return to the previous screen.
Name
Description
A Character Entry Field
Field for entering the title.
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Scene File]/[Picture File] subname.
B Character Cursor
Select a character using the key cursor
D, and press the Set button (R) to input
the selected character at the position of
the character cursor. The character
cursor moves to the next position on the
right each time a character is input.
The cursor can be moved using the
arrow keys F.
C Character Keys
Use the cross-shaped button (JKH I)
to move the key cursor D to the
character you want to enter.
D Key Cursor
Indicates the currently selected
character or item. Use the cross-shaped
button (JKH I) to move the cursor.
[Store File] Menu Screen
Memo :
● Files cannot be written in the following cases. (Displayed in
gray, selection disabled)
● The inserted SDHC card is not supported (those other
than SDHC Class 6/10 cards, or unformatted cards).
(File name appears as A---B. )
● When a write-protected SDHC card is inserted (a
mark appears beside the SDHC card icon.)
E Confirmation Buttons Select [Store] and press the Set
button (R) to confirm the title.
Select [Cancel] and press the Set
button (R) to abort character input and
return to the previous screen.
5 Name the file.
Enter the subname using the software keyboard.
F Arrow Keys
Moves the position of the character
cursor B.
G [BS] Backspace Key
Select [BS] and press the Set
button (R) to delete the character on the
left of the character cursor B.
H [SP] Space Key
Select [SP] and press the Set
button (R) to enter a space at the current
position of the character cursor B.
6 Select [Store] from the confirmation buttons E, and
press the Set button (R).
A confirmation screen appears.
7 Select [Store] on the confirmation screen, and press
the Set button (R).
Saving starts, and AStoring...B appears on the screen.
120
5 Select [Load] on the confirmation screen, and press
the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and ALoading...B appears on the screen.
7
5
Memo :
● If you do not want to save the file, select [Cancel] or press
the [CANCEL] button to return to the previous screen.
● When saving of a file fails, a AStore Error!B message
(indicated in red frame) appears for several seconds, after
which the previous screen is displayed.
8 Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, ACompleteB appears on
the screen, and the menu screen closes automatically.
Memo :
● If you do not want to load the file, select [Cancel] or press
the [CANCEL] button to return to the previous screen.
● When loading of a file fails, a ALoad Error!B message
(indicated in red frame) appears for several seconds, after
which the previous screen is displayed.
6 Loading is complete.
Loading a Setup File
After loading of the file is complete, ACompleteB appears on
the screen, and the menu screen closes automatically.
Select the [Setup File Manage] menu on the [Main Menu]
screen, and press the Set button (R). (A Page 97)
Resetting Setup Files
1 Display the [Setup File Manage] menu.
2 Select [Load File] and press the Set button (R).
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and press the Set
button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
1 Display the [Setup File Manage] menu.
Select the [Setup File Manage] menu on the [Main Menu]
screen, and press the Set button (R). (A Page 97)
2 Select [Reset File] and press the Set button (R).
4 Select the file to load using the cross-shaped
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and press the Set
button (R).
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
Cursor
4 Select the file to delete using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
Memo :
● Scene files and preset scene files stored inside the SDHC
card cannot be selected or reset.
5 Select [Reset] on the confirmation screen, and press
[Load File] Menu Screen
Memo :
● When the write-protect switch of the inserted SDHC card
is set, a
mark appears beside the SDHC card icon.
Setup files can be loaded from an SDHC card even if the
write-protect switch is set.
●A
mark is displayed at the right end when there are
some settings that are not supported by the setup file
(e.g., picture files saved using the GY-HM700 series).
These files can be loaded by this camera recorder, but
some of the settings will not be compatible. (A Page 119)
● Setup files that are completely incompatible will not be
displayed. (A Page 119)
the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and AResetting...B appears on the screen.
Memo :
● If you do not want to reset the file, select [Cancel] or press
the [CANCEL] button to return to the previous screen.
6 Resetting is complete.
After resetting of the file is complete, ACompleteB appears on
the screen, and the menu screen closes automatically.
121
Connecting External Devices
Connecting an External
Monitor
To output live or playback video images and audio sound to
an external monitor, select the output signals from the
camera recorder, and connect using an appropriate cable
according to the monitor to be used.
Connecting via Composite/Component
Output
Either component or composite signals can be output from the
BNC terminals on the terminal area of the camera recorder.
Connect the external monitor to the [Y/VIDEO] output terminal
for composite signals, or to [Y/VIDEO], [PB], and [PR] video
signal output terminals for component signals.
* Select the output signal using [Output Terminal] in the
[A/V Out] menu. (A Page 92)
* To display menu screens or status screens on the external
monitor, set [Analog Out Char.] in the [A/V Out] menu to
AOnB. (A Page 92)
Connecting via SDI
Either HD-SDI or SD-SDI signals can be output from the
[HD/SD-SDI] terminal (BNC) on the terminal area of the
camera recorder.
● Digital video signals, together with embedded
(superimposed) audio signals and time code signals, are
output for both the HD-SDI and SD-SDI signals.
● User’s bit output from the [HD/SD-SDI] output terminal is
used as a flag to determine valid video signals. Therefore,
accurate values will not be output.
Memo :
● The sampling frequency for embedded (superimposed)
audio signals is 48 kHz. Time code of the built-in time
generator as well as playback time code are also output.
* Select the output signal using [HD/SD-SDI Out] in the
[A/V Out] menu. (A Page 92)
* When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is
set to ASD (DV)B, only SD-SDI signals are output.
(A Page 75)
* To display menu screens or status screens on the external
monitor, set [SDI Out Char.] in the [A/V Out] menu to AOnB.
(A Page 92)
[AUDIO OUTPUT]
Composite Output
Component Output
[Y/VIDEO]
[Y/VIDEO], [PB], [PR]
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
[HD/SD-SDI]
SDI IN
AUDIO IN
䡵 Settings for Composite Output
1 Down convert the signals.
You can select the method to Adown convertB HD video
images to SD images during composite output.
Set using [Down Convert] in the [A/V Out] menu.
The available modes include ASide CutB, ALetter BoxB
(blackened at the top and bottom), and ASqueezeB (full size,
compressed at the left and right). (A Page 92)
Memo :
● When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is
set to ASD (DV)B, selection cannot be made. (A Page 75)
2 Add setup signals.
Setup signals can be added to the output video signals
during composite output.
* You can select whether to add setup signals using [Set Up]
in the [A/V Out] menu. (A Page 92)
122
䡵 Settings for SDI Output
1 Down convert the signals.
You can select the method to Adown convertB HD video
images to SD images during SD-SDI output.
Set using [Down Convert] in the [A/V Out] menu.
The available modes include ASide CutB, ALetter BoxB
(blackened at the top and bottom), and ASqueezeB (full size,
compressed at the left and right). (A Page 92)
Memo :
● When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is
set to ASD (DV)B, selection cannot be made. (A Page 75)
IEEE1394 Connection
[PHONES] Terminal
Audio output from the [PHONES] terminal can be selected
using [Audio Monitor] in the [A/V Out] menu (A Page 93) as
well as the [MONITOR SELECT] switch on the camera
recorder.
The different combinations of settings that are output from
the [PHONES] terminal and monitor speaker are as follows.
[MONITOR
SELECT]
Switch
Settings
[Audio Monitor]
Settings
[PHONES]
Terminal
L
Speaker
R
[CH-1]
^
CH1
CH1
[BOTH]
[Mix]
CH1+CH2
CH1+CH2
[Stereo]
[CH-2]
^
“ Backup recording ” can be performed, which allows the
same image recorded to the SDHC card on the camera
recorder to be recorded to the external device connected to
the IEEE1394 terminal. (A Page 124)
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
[IEEE1394] Terminal
Note :
● When connecting the camera recorder to an external
device using an IEEE1394 cable, make sure to observe
the following. Improper connection may cause the circuit
of the connected unit to malfunction.
● Turn off the power of the camera recorder and
connected devices before connecting the IEEE1394
cable.
● Do not connect the cable in an environment where
static electricity occurs or is likely to occur.
● Make sure that each camera recorder is connected to
only one external device at any one time.
● When the video format input from the [IEEE1394] terminal
is different from the video format of the camera recorder, a
AVIDEO FORMAT INCORRECTB message is
displayed. Set according to the video format entered for
[System Definition], [Camera Resolution], and
[Frame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Format] menu.
(A Page 75)
VIDEO FORMAT
INCORRECT
● If the [INT/EXT] IEEE1394 interface terminal switch is set
at AEXTB and the AHQB mode is selected in
[Frame & Bit Rate], signals will not be output from the
[IEEE1394] terminal. (A Page 75)
123
Connecting External Devices
IEEE1394 Connection
(continued)
5 Set the external device to a mode that enables
recording.
For setting and operation of external devices, refer to the
instruction manual of the respective devices.
Note :
Backup Recording
When the camera recorder is set to Camera mode, images
shot using it can be stream output from the IEEE1394
terminal.
According to the recording operation on the camera recorder,
recording to the camera recorder and external device may be
performed synchronously or separately.
1 Connect the camera recorder to the backup device.
Connect the camera recorder to the backup device using an
IEEE1394 cable, using the camera recorder as the master
device.
● Adjust the camera recorder and external device to the same
IEEE1394 settings.
● Start recording only after ensuring that the devices are
properly connected.
6 Perform recording using the camera recorder.
If the settings in 3 are appropriate, video images will be
recorded to the camera recorder and external device.
Note :
● Images, audio and time code at the points where recording
starts and ends may be out of sync depending on the
camera recorder and backup device in use.
Memo :
● When backup recording starts, a ATRIGGER TO EXTB
message appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder for
about 3 seconds.
Camera recorder
(Master Device)
䡵 Checking Videos Recorded on the
External Device
Perform setting in the [Record Format] menu. Select a video
format in [System Definition]. (A Page 75)
(IEEE1394 Input mode of Media mode)
When images are displayed in thumbnails in Media mode
(SD Card mode) and power of the device connected to the
[IEEE1394] terminal is turned on, pressing the [CAM/MEDIA]
selection button displays the playback images of the
connected device on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
(Only for HD video systems)
Pressing the same button has no effect if the [IEEE1394]
connection is not recognized, such as when the power of the
device connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal is turned off.
When an SD video system is in use, availability of the
[IEEE1394] terminal connection cannot be detected in Media
mode (SD Card mode). Allow the camera recorder to detect
the [IEEE1394] terminal connection in advance by turning on
the power of the connected equipment in Camera mode.
Refer to [Status Screen in IEEE1394 Input Mode] (A Page 109)
for the status display of this mode.
[HD (MPEG2)] : Performs backup in the HDV format.
[SD (DV)]
: Performs backup in the DV format.
1 Set the [Record Format] menu according to the input
Note :
video format. (A Page 75)
● To back up in the HDV format, be sure to select SP mode for
the [Frame & Bit Rate] setting.
2 Press the [CAM/MEDIA] button to set to the IEEE1394
[IEEE1394]
Terminal
Backup Device
[INT/EXT] IEEE1394
Interface Terminal
Switch
IEEE1394
Cable
Signal Flow
2 Set the camera recorder to Camera mode.
3 Set the recording video format.
Input mode.
4 Perform the following settings on the camera recorder
(master device).
A Set the [INT/EXT] IEEE1394 interface terminal switch to
AEXTB.
B Switch to Camera mode.
C Specify how recording to the camera recorder and
external device is to be performed with the recording
operation on the camera recorder using [1394 Rec
Trigger] in the [Others] menu. (A Page 94)
124
3 Set the external device to the playback mode.
Video images recorded on the external device are displayed
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Note :
● This mode is used for viewing images input to the
[IEEE1394] terminal from an external device, and not
intended for recording input images on the camera
recorder.
Input of Composite Video Signals
from External Device (GYHM790CHU/GY-HM790U only)
This camera recorder is equipped with an AUX input terminal
on the side for recording composite video signals from an
external device to an SDHC card.
6 Start/Stop recording using the [REC] button on the
camera recorder.
The EE image of the input signal is output in the SD (DV)
format from the respective video output terminals.
Note :
● During recording of external video signals, checking of the
recording (Clip Review) cannot be performed using the
[RET] button on the lens.
● Do not touch the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch while recording
is in progress.
䡵 Status Screen Display in AUX Mode
[GENLOCK/AUX] Switch
In the AUX mode, AAUXB is displayed on the status screens
of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
[GENLOCK/AUX IN]
Terminal
AAUXB Display
720x480
60i AUX
00:00:00:00
DD
Memo :
● [Favorites Menu] does not function in AUX mode.
1 Set the camera recorder to Camera mode.
2 Set the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch to AAUXB.
A 100min
B 100min
STBY
282min
Status Screen
AAUXB Display
The [Record Format] menu settings are as follows. (A Page 75)
[System Definition] Item
: SD (DV)
[Camera Resolution] Item
[Frame Rate] Item
: 720 x 480
: 60i
3 Set the following items in the [Record Format] menu.
(A Page 75)
● Select the format for recording to the SDHC card in
[File Format] (AQuickTimeB or AAVIB).
● Set the [Aspect Ratio].
CH1
CH2
DF
FREE
STBY
A
720x480
min 60i AUX
B 123 min OK
DD
100min
67.8min
Enlarged Status Display Screen
A16:9B : When the input analog signal is a squeeze signal
A4:3B : All cases other than that stated above
4 Set [Set Up] in the [A/V Out] menu. (A
Page 92)
A7.5%B : When input analog signals include setup signals
A0.0%B : When input analog signals do not include setup signals
5 Input composite video signals from the external
device to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.
Note :
● Input jitter-free composite video signals.
Input level : 1.0 ± 0.3 V (p-p)
125
Connecting External Devices
1 Set the camera recorder to Camera mode.
2 Set [Genlock Input] in the [Others] menu to ABNCB.
Input of External
Synchronizing Signal
(Genlock)
(A Page 93)
Memo :
This camera recorder is equipped with a genlock input
terminal on the side.
Synchronizing signals can also be input from a KA-M790G
unit (Multicore Remote Adapter: sold separately) that is
connected to the accessory connection terminal (68 pin) at
the rear of the camera recorder.
The following describes the case of signal input using the
side [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.
Input the external synchronizing signal from the
[GENLOCK INPUT] terminal, and synchronize the camera
recorder’s video and playback images with the external
signal.
You can also adjust the H (Horizontal) phase of the camera
recorder’s video signals with respect to the external
synchronizing signals on the [Genlock Adjust] screen of the
[Others] menu. (A Page 96)
Only horizontal (H) and vertical (V) genlock are supported.
The camera recorder does not come with an SC (subcarrier)
lock function.
䡵 Synchronizing Signal to Use
SD
synchronizing
signal
: BB (Black Burst) signal
Supports SMPTE170M(RS-170A)-NTSC
Supports ITU-R BT.470-6 PAL
HD
synchronizing
signal
: HDTV 3 level synchronizing signal
Supports SMPTE296M-HD720p
Supports SMPTE274M-HD1080i
Note :
● The genlock function can only be used in the Camera
mode. It is not available in the AUX mode (U model only)
and Media mode.
[GENLOCK/AUX] Switch
(U Model only)
[GENLOCK/AUX IN] Terminal (U Model)
[GENLOCK INPUT] Terminal (E Model)
External Synchronizing
Signal
SYNC Signal
Generator
External
Synchronizing
Signal
Video Equipment
126
● During input of synchronizing signals from the accessory
connection terminal (68 pin) at the rear of the camera
recorder, set to AAdapterB.
3 Set the [GENLOCK/AUX] selection switch to
AGENLOCKB. (U model only)
4 When in the standby or stop mode, input
synchronizing signals from the SYNC generator to the
[GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.
● When the camera recorder’s video is locking to the external
synchronizing signal, ASYNC LOCKINGB appears on the
screen.
● After locking to the external synchronizing signal is
complete, the display disappears and recording can be
performed.
Note :
● When the frame rate is set to 30p, 60p, 60i, or 24p in the
[Frame & Bit Rate] item of the [Record Format] menu, 59.94 Hz
synchronizing signals (vertical synchronization) are input.
50 Hz/60 Hz synchronizing signals are not synchronized.
● When the frame rate is set to 25p, 50p, or 50i in the
[Frame & Bit Rate] item of the [Record Format] menu, 50 Hz
synchronizing signals (vertical synchronization) are input.
59.94 Hz/60 Hz synchronizing signals are not synchronized.
● Do not connect or disconnect the input cable for the
synchronizing signals during recording or playback.
● If the power is turned ON during input of external
synchronizing signals, vertical oscillation may occur. This is
not a malfunction.
● Signals such as VTR playback signals with jitters may not be
synchronized.
● The camera recorder does not come with an SC (subcarrier)
lock function. Color flash may occur during switching such as
when composite signals are used by a switcher.
䡵 Phase Items to Synchronize
The phase items to be synchronized may vary depending on
the input synchronizing signal and output video signal. (See
table below)
Terminal
Input Sync Signal
Tri-sync
BB
720p
1080i
H, V, F
V
V, F
H, V, F
V
V, F
Output Video
Signal
VIDEO
Composite
SD Component
HD Component
Y/PB/PR 720p
HD Component
1080i
SD-SDI
HD/SD-SDI HD-SDI 720p
HD-SDI 1080i
H : Horizontal phase
V : Vertical phase
V
H, V
V
V, F
V
H, V, F
H, V, F
V
V, F
V
H, V
V
V, F
V
H, V, F
F : Field phase
Adjusting the H Phase
1 Select [Genlock Adjust] in the [Others] menu. (A Page 96)
2 Select the phase item to adjust in [Genlock Adjust].
Analog SD H Phase : For adjusting the H phase of SD analog
signal.
Analog HD H Phase : For adjusting the H phase of HD analog
signal.
SD-SDI H Phase
: For adjusting the H phase of SD-SDI
signal.
HD-SDI H Phase
: For adjusting the H phase of HD-SDI
signal.
3 Select a value using the cross-shaped button (JK).
The H phase of the camera recorder’s video signals is
adjusted with respect to the external synchronizing signal
input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.
You can alter the setting value for [Analog HD H Phase], [SDSDI H Phase], and [HD-SDI H Phase] in increments of 10 by
pressing down the cross-shaped button (JK) for 2 seconds
or longer.
Memo :
● Adjustment cannot be performed when recording or
playback is in progress.
● The video image may be disrupted momentarily during
adjustment. This is not a malfunction.
127
Connecting External Devices
Displaying Return Video
from External Device
6 Press the [RET] button on the lens.
The return video is displayed on the viewfinder and LCD
monitor while the [RET] button is pressed down.
Return video from an external device (switcher, etc.) can be
displayed on the viewfinder or LCD monitor of the camera
recorder.
You can select the destination to input return video in the
[Return Input] item of the [Others] menu. (A Page 93)
[RET] Button
IRIS
AM
T
RET
W
Note :
● This function can only be used in the Camera mode. It is
not available in the AUX mode (U model) and Media mode.
1 Set the camera recorder to Camera mode.
2 Set the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch to AAUXB. (U model
only)
3 Set the function of the [RET] button on the lens to
Return Video.
Set [Camera Function] menu B [Switch Set] menu B
[LENS RET] to AReturnB. (A Page 79)
4 Select a destination to input the return video.
Set the [Return Input] item in the [Others] menu. (A Page 93)
Adapter : During input of return video from the KA-M790G
(Multicore Remote Adapter : sold separately)
connected to the accessory connector (68-pin)
at the rear of the camera recorder
Studio
: During input of return video from the [STUDIO]
terminal at the side of the camera recorder
5 Select the aspect ratio for the return video.
Set the [Return Aspect] item in the [Others] menu. (A Page 93)
16:9
4:3
128
: When the return video is a squeeze signal
: When the return video is a 4:3 aspect signal
(including Letter Box)
Note :
● The following displays and operations are invalid when
return video is displayed. [Zebra], [Skin Area],
[Spot Meter], [Focus Assist] ([ACCU-Focus] operation),
[Aspect Marker], [Safety Zone], [Center Mark], and status
displays.
● When return video is displayed, the [VF Display] and
[LCD Mirror Mode] items in the [LCD/VF] menu become
invalid, and the camera recorder operates as follows.
● [VF Display]
: Operates in the AColorB setting.
● [LCD Mirror Mode] : Operates in the ANormalB setting.
Studio System Connection
Memo :
● For connections between the Camera Remote Control Units, refer to the [INSTRUCTIONS] of the Camera Remote Control
Unit.
Studio Viewfinder
VF-HP790G
Headset
(Beyerdynamic)
Remote Control
Unit RM-LP25U
Headset
(Beyerdynamic)
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U/
GY-HM790CHE*/GY-HM790E*
26Pin Camera
Cable
VC-P110U (5m)
VC-P112U (20m)
VC-P113U (50m)
VC-P114U (100m)
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P250
TALLY
CALL
FULL AUTO
F1
BARS
F2
MENU/SHUTTER
F3
GAIN
SHUTTER
PAINT
WHITE
POWER
B
MID
VARIABLE
IRIS
W.BAL
HIGH
PUSH-ON
MASTER BLACK
AUTO
STEP
SHUTTER
MENU
F4
PUSH-ON
I
A
R
LOW
B
AUTO
MANU
PRESET
GAIN
Studio Adapter
Coaxial cable (for E model)
KA-790G
Multicore Remote Adapter
KA-M790G
Studio Viewfinder
VF-HP790G
O
INTERCOM
LEVEL
DOWN
UP
DOWN
UP
CLOSE
OPEN
Camera Remote Control Unit
RM-HP250AU/RM-HP250DE*
Headset
(Beyerdynamic)
Remote Control
Unit RM-LP25U
Headset
(Beyerdynamic)
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U/
GY-HM790CHE*/GY-HM790E*
26Pin Camera Cable
VC-P110U (5m)
VC-P112U (20m)
VC-P113U (50m)
VC-P114U (100m)
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P250
TALLY
CALL
FULL AUTO
F1
BARS
F2
F3
MENU/SHUTTER
GAIN
SHUTTER
PAINT
WHITE
PUSH-ON
POWER
B
MID
VARIABLE
IRIS
W.BAL
HIGH
MENU
MASTER BLACK
AUTO
STEP
SHUTTER
F4
PUSH-ON
I
A
R
LOW
B
AUTO
MANU
PRESET
GAIN
Studio Adapter
Coaxial cable (for E model)
KA-790G
Multicore Remote Adapter
KA-M790G
Studio Viewfinder
VF-HP790G
O
INTERCOM
LEVEL
DOWN
DOWN
UP
UP
CLOSE
OPEN
HD/SD-SDI
Component
Camera Remote Control Unit
RM-HP250AU/RM-HP250DE*
Headset
(Beyerdynamic)
Remote Control
Unit RM-LP25U
Headset
(Beyerdynamic)
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U/
GY-HM790CHE*/GY-HM790E*
26Pin Camera Cable
VC-P110U (5m)
VC-P112U (20m)
VC-P113U (50m)
VC-P114U (100m)
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P250
TALLY
CALL
FULL AUTO
F1
BARS
F2
F3
MENU/SHUTTER
GAIN
SHUTTER
PAINT
WHITE
PUSH-ON
PUSH-ON
LOW
POWER
B
MID
VARIABLE
IRIS
W.BAL
HIGH
MENU
MASTER BLACK
AUTO
STEP
SHUTTER
F4
I
A
R
B
PRESET
AUTO
MANU
GAIN
Studio Adapter
KA-790G
INTERCOM
LEVEL
Coaxial cable (for E model)
Multicore Remote Adapter
KA-M790G
O
DOWN
UP
DOWN
UP
CLOSE
OPEN
Camera Remote Control Unit
RM-HP250AU/RM-HP250DE*
External Synchronizing
Signal
HD Switcher
* Models with an E suffix are for the European market and the UL Listing mark is not applicable.
129
Connecting External Devices
Managing/Editing Clips on
a PC
2 Select [Change] using the cross-shaped button (JK),
and press the Set button (R).
The camera recorder switches to USB mode.
Loading Clips to the PC (USB Connection
Mode)
You can load clips to a PC by connecting the camera
recorder to the PC via the USB port. Doing so enables clips
stored in the SDHC card to be managed and edited on the
PC.
Files on the SDHC card can be managed/edited on the
connected PC in this mode only for USB mass storage class
devices that are recognized by the said PC as a peripheral
drive.
Memo :
● Files cannot be written to the SDHC card.
● Make sure to manage/edit files recorded in the MP4 file
format using the (JVC ProHD Clip Manager) PC
application software in the bundled CD-ROM.
● For details on how to install the application software, refer
to the [User’s Guide] of the [SxS Memory Card Device
Driver Software] inside the bundled CD-ROM.
1 Connect the camera recorder to the PC using a USB
cable.
A confirmation message AChange to USB ModeB to enable
the USB connection appears.
[USB] Terminal
PC
130
2
Memo :
● If recording is in progress (including recording on the
camera recorder and device connected to the IEEE1394
terminal), the AChange to USB ModeB message appears
after recording stops.
● If playback is in progress, the camera recorder switches to
USB mode after the file closes automatically, such as
when playback stops.
䡵 Disconnecting
Disable the connection on the PC, then remove the USB
cable from the camera recorder.
Doing so exits the USB mode and switches the camera
recorder to Camera mode.
Memo :
● The procedure for disabling the USB connection varies
according to the PC in use. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of the PC.
Remote Control Unit
Connection
The switch functions of the camera recorder can be
configured using the remote control unit.
* Remote control units supported : RM-LP25U, RM-LP55U,
RM-LP57U
1 Connect the remote control unit to the camera recorder.
Connect the remote cable of the remote control unit to the
[REMOTE] terminal on the terminal area of the camera
recorder.
䡵 Precautions for Using the Remote
Control Unit
● When the switches of the camera recorder and remote
control unit are operated at the same time, the switch
operation of the remote control unit takes priority over that
of the camera recorder.
● Focus and zoom operations cannot be performed using
the remote control unit.
● The shutter speed may vary slightly from the value
displayed on the camera recorder.
● When the frame rate in [Frame & Bit Rate] of the camera
recorder is set to A24pB, the shutter speed cannot be set
to A1/60B using the remote control unit. Even if the shutter
speed is set to A1/60B, the actual speed is A1/48B.
(A Page 75)
● When the camera recorder is in the Media mode, Auto
White does not function even when it is operated using
the remote control unit.
● When the H phase is set using a remote control unit, only
the H phase of the SD signal is activated.
● When setting the H Phase using a remote control unit,
any value beyond the setting range in the menu of the
camera recorder cannot be set. (A Page 96)
[REMOTE] Terminal
RM-LP25U
Note :
● Turn off the power of the camera recorder when
connecting a remote control unit.
2 Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
3 Set the operate switch of the remote control unit to
ON.
Memo :
● For details on functions that can be operated using the
remote control unit, refer to [List of Remote Control Unit
Functions] (A Page 132).
131
Connecting External Devices
Remote Control Unit
Connection (continued)
3: Available
-: Not available
Function
3
IRIS CONTROL
Iris F Value
Display
List of Remote Control Unit Functions
䡵 RM-LP25U
3: Available
-: Not available
Function
SHUTTER
NORMAL
1
2
1/100* , 1/120*
GAIN
3
-
AUTO KNEE
3
KNEE POINT
3
3
3
3
4
Rear Input
3
1/1000
3
1/2000
3
TALLY(PVW)*
䡵 RM-LP55U
3: Available
-: Not available
Function
3
CAM MODE CAM, BARS
3
-6dB
-
CONTOUR
OFF, ON (LEVEL)
3
-3dB
-
GAMMA
OFF, ON (LEVEL)
3
0dB
3
WHT.BAL.
3
MANUAL, PRESET, AUTO1,
AUTO2, FAW
3
3dB
6dB
3
AUTO WHITE
3
3
WHITE PAINT
3
+3dB*5,
3
3
dB mode 0dB,
+6dB,
+9dB, +12dB,
+15dB*5, +18dB
18dB
3
ALC+EEI
3
ALC
3
12dB
3
15dB
VARIABLE
LEVEL
-
GAIN
PAINT
SHUTTER
LEVEL
ALC
3
R
3
B
3
STEP
3
3
GAMMA
LEVEL
3
NORMAL
3
COMPRESS*3
3
MANUAL
3
PRESET
3
FAW
3
AW A
3
AW B
3
WHITE PAINT
3
AUTO WHITE
3
AUTO BLACK
-
BLACK PAINT
3
1
2
1/100* , 1/120* ,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000, 1/4000*5,
1/10000*5
3
EEI
3
MANUAL, AUTO
3
AUTO IRIS LEVEL, MANUAL
IRIS LEVEL
3
ZOOM
WIDE, STOP, TELE
-
FOCUS
NEAR, STOP, FAR
-
3
STRETCH*3
3
NORMAL
3
DETAIL
132
CALL*
PREVIEW
Rear Input
3
LOLUX
WHITE BALANCE
MODE
3
4
TALLY(PGM)*4
1/500
9dB
BLACK
3
TALLY (LED)
BARS
3
SPEED
MASTER BLACK
3
1/250
VARIABLE*6
3
IRIS
H.PHASE*
5
3
䡵 RM-LP57U
3: Available
-: Not available
Function
MODE
BARS, CAM
H.PHASE*5
SC COARSE
0⬚, 90⬚, 180⬚, 270⬚
GAIN
WHITE BAL
-
SC FINE
CONTOUR
3
3
OFF, ON
3
LEVEL
3
0dB
3
+6dB
3
+9dB
3
+12dB
3
+18dB
3
ALC
3
ALC+EEI
3
AUTO1
3
AUTO2
3
FAW
3
AUTO WHITE
3
PAINT
R
3
B
3
SHUTTER
OFF
1/100*
3
1,
1/120*2
3
1/500
3
1/1000
3
1/2000
3
EEI
3
3
MASTER BLACK
IRIS
3
1/250
MANUAL, AUTO
3
MANUAL LEVEL
3
AI LEVEL
3
*1 : Only when the [Frame & Bit Rate] of the camera
recorder is A60B, A30B, or A24B.
*2 : Only when the [Frame & Bit Rate] of the camera
recorder is A50B or A25B.
*3 : Switches automatically to ANORMALB when both
[STRETCH] and [COMPRESS] are set to AOffB.
*4 : Only when [Tally System] in the [Others...] menu is set
to AStudioB.
*5 : Only available on RM-LP55U(A).
*6 : This function may not be operable for some RM-LP25U
software versions. For more details, please consult
your nearest JVC dealer. Also, it cannot be controlled
when the camera recorder is set to the Variable Frame
Rec mode.
133
Others
Error Displays and Actions
Alarm displays on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens, as well as the tally lamps and alarm tones are output as follows
according to the alarm status.
Memo :
● This camera recorder makes use of a microcomputer. Noise interference from external sources may prevent it from functioning
properly. When this occurs, turn off and on the power of the camera recorder again.
Error Display
Status Screen
Status
Action
* The alarm sounds and the tally lamp blinks
about once every second.
Turn off the power, and turn it on again.
If the error persists, consult your nearest JVC
dealer.
Menu Screen
Thumbnail Screen
TURN POWER OFF
TURN BACK ON
LATER
^
INCORRECT MEDIA
[***]
Incorrect Media [***]
INVALID MEDIA
[***]
Invalid Media [***]
FORMATTING
REQUIRED
[***]
Formatting Required
[***]
RESTORE MEDIA
[***]
Restore Media [***]
NO MEDIA
^
^
System error.
SDHC card is not supported (a type other than Insert an SDHC card that is compliant with
Class 6/10). (***: A, B, A/B)
Class 6/10.
(A Page 31)
● An irrecoverable error is detected.
● SDHC card reading/writing error.
(Faulty SDHC card) (***: A, B, A/B)
Replace the SDHC card with a new one.
SDHC card is not formatted using this camera
recorder. (***: A, B, A/B)
Format the card using this camera recorder.
(A Page 33)
● SDHC card requires restoring.
● Recording is not successfully completed.
(Temporary blackout/card removed)
(***: A, B, A/B)
Restore the card using this camera recorder.
(A Page 34)
[REC] button is pressed when an SDHC card
is not inserted.
Insert an SDHC card. (A Page 31)
No Media
No SDHC card is found in Media mode or
when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Insert an SDHC card. (A Page 31)
^
No Clips
No clips are found on the inserted SDHC card
in Media mode or when the thumbnail screen
is displayed.
Insert an SDHC card that contains playable
clips. (A Page 31, 61)
NO CLIP
^
No viewable clips are found on the card for
Clip Review.
Insert an SDHC card that contains clips that
can be reviewed. (A Page 31, 56)
REC INHIBITED
^
[REC] button is pressed when the write-protect Turn off the write-protect switch of the SDHC
switch of the SDHC card is set.
card, or insert a recordable SDHC card.
(A Page 31)
CLOSE SLOT
COVER
^
● Recording to the SDHC card is started with
the cover of the selected slot left open.
● The cover is opened while recording is in
progress.
LOST MEDIA INFO [*]
Lost Media Info [*]
134
Close the cover of the SDHC card slot.
(A Page 32)
● Card is removed while recording is in
Restore the card using this camera recorder.
progress.
(A Page 34)
● Card is removed while formatting is in
progress.
● Card is removed while restoring is in
progress.
● Card is removed while adding the OK mark.
● Card is removed while writing a setup file.
● Card is removed while deleting a clip. (*: A, B)
Error Display
Menu Screen
Thumbnail Screen
Status
EXT-RECORDER
POWER ?
^
Power of the camera recorder is
turned off while the external device
connection is detected, and the same
connection cannot be detected
several seconds after power is turned
on again. (Error displays for about 7
seconds)
When making use of a connected external
device, turn on the power supply on the
connected device.
VIDEO FORMAT
INCORRECT
^
● Video format of the file for Clip
Review is different from the
[Frame & Bit Rate] setting of the
camera recorder.
Set [Camera Resolution] and
[Frame & Bit Rate] correctly. (A Page 75)
Status Screen
Action
● IEEE1394 input video format is
different from the
[Camera Resolution] and
[Frame & Bit Rate] settings.
MEDIA FULL
^
● The video system of the camera
recorder is not compatible with the
IEEE1394 input signal.
Set [System Definition] in the
[Record Format] menu according to the
IEEE1394 signal. (A Page 75)
● [REC] button is pressed when the
media in use has no remaining
space.
Replace the SDHC card with a new one.
● Remaining space ran out during
recording.
FAN MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
^
● Usage time of the fan has
exceeded 9000 hours.
Check the fan and replace accordingly. For
more details, consult your nearest JVC
dealer.
Memo :
● You can check the usage time of the fan in the
[Others] menu B [System Information] B
[Fan Hour]. (A Page 95)
Tally Lamps
The tally lamps start blinking when the remaining space on the SDHC card is running out during recording, or when the battery
power is running low.
Blinking Mode
Blinks slowly
(once every second)
Blinks quickly
(4 times a second)
Remaining Battery Power/SDHC Card Space
● Battery power is low
● Remaining recording time on SDHC card is less than 3 minutes
● SDHC card is full
● Error on the camera recorder
Alarm Tone
Alarm tone is output from the monitor speaker and [PHONES] terminal when the battery level is low.
Alarm tone is output from the monitor speaker and [PHONES] terminal when the SDHC card is full. (Camera mode only)
Alarm tone is also output when an error occurs in the camera recorder.
Memo :
● [Alarm Level] in the [Others] menu can be used to specify whether alarm tone is to be output, as well as the volume level.
(A Page 93)
● Alarm tone is not output during recording.
135
Others
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Action
Power does not turn on.
● Is the AC adapter properly connected?
● Is the battery charged?
● Is the power turned on immediately after it is turned off? Make sure to wait for
an interval of at least 5 seconds before turning on the power again.
Unable to start recording.
● Is the record button lock switch on the handle turned on?
● Is the write-protect switch of the SDHC card turned on? Make sure that the
write-protect switch is turned off. (A Page 31)
● Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode? (Operation mode indicator:
Lights up in blue/purple) If the operation mode indicator lights up in another
color, camera images are not output. Use the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button
to switch to the Camera mode. (A Page 8)
Camera image is not output on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screens.
● Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode? (Operation mode indicator:
Lights up in blue/purple) If the operation mode indicator lights up in another
color, camera images are not output. Use the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button
to switch to the Camera mode. (A Page 8)
Images on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screens appear dark or blurred.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Playback does not start after selecting a
clip thumbnail and pressing the Set
button (R).
● Is the selected clip a playable clip? Playback is not possible if the clip has a
different video format setting.
HDV/DV signals cannot be input.
● Is the camera recorder set to the IEEE1394 Input mode? (Operation mode
indicator: Lights up in orange)
● Is [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu correctly set?
(A Page 75)
No sound during playback.
● Is the currently played clip recorded in the Variable Frame Rec mode?
(A Page 60)
The [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2]
adjustment knob does not work.
● Is the [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2] switch set to AAUTOB?
● Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to AONB?
SDHC card cannot be initialized (formatted).
● Is the write-protect switch of the SDHC card turned on? Make sure that the
write-protect switch is turned off. (A Page 31)
Battery alarm appears even after loading
a charged battery.
● Is the battery too old?
The time code and user’s bit are not
displayed.
● The time code and user’s bit are not displayed in IEEE1394 Input mode.
● Even in Camera mode or SD Card mode, the time code and user’s bit may not
be displayed depending to the type of status display.
● Is [TC/UB] of [Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu set to AOffB? To display
the time code and user’s bit, set it to AOnB. (A Page 91)
136
Readjust the brightness of the LCD monitor screen and viewfinder.
Is the [ND FILTER] switch set to [1/16]?
Is the iris closed?
Is the shutter speed setting too high?
Check the connection of the viewfinder cable.
Is the amount of peaking too little? Use the [LCD PEAKING +/-] button to
adjust the contour for the LCD monitor screen and the [VF PEAKING] knob
for the viewfinder screen. (A Page 28)
● Is the [GENLOCK/AUX] selection switch set to AAUXB?
Camera images are not output in the AUX mode. (U model)
Symptom
Action
The date and time are not displayed.
● The date and time are only displayed on the STATUS 2 and STATUS 3
screens in the Camera mode (during shooting). (A Page 106, 107)
No output from the [Y/VIDEO], [PB], and
[PR] video signal output terminals.
● Is [Output Terminal] in the [A/V Out] menu correctly set? (A Page 92)
Incorrect display on the viewfinder.
● Is the LCD monitor used with [LCD + VF] in the [LCD/VF] menu set to AOffB?
(A Page 88)
IEEE1394 connection between the camera
recorder and the external device cannot
be established (e.g., no image on the
camera recorder and/or external device).
●
●
●
●
When the camera recorder is in the Media
mode (SD Card mode), pressing the
[CAM/MEDIA] button does not switch it to
the IEEE1394 Input mode.
● Is the power of the device connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal turned ON?
If the power of the connected device is OFF, the camera recorder does not
switch to the IEEE1394 Input mode.
● Is [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu set to ASD (DV)B? (A Page 75)
When the SD video system is in use, the camera recorder is unable to
recognize the IEEE1394 connection in the Media mode (SD Card mode).
Turn ON the power of the IEEE1394-connected device in the Camera mode,
followed by switching from the Media mode (SD Card mode) to the IEEE1394
Input mode using the [CAM/MEDIA] button.
Is the operation mode correctly set? (A Page 8)
Is the [INT/EXT] IEEE1394 interface terminal switch correctly set?
Is [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu correctly set? (A Page 75)
Check the connection, such as by removing the IEEE1394 cable and inserting
it again, or by reconnecting the power.
Specifications
General
Power
Power
consumption
: DC 12 V (10.5 V to 17 V)
: Approx. 26 W
(During recording [when the camera
recorder + standard lens + LCD monitor
are in use])
Mass
GY-HM790CHU
: Approx. 2.7 kg
GY-HM790CHE
: Approx. 2.8 kg
GY-HM790U
: Approx. 3.7 kg
GY-HM790E
: Approx. 3.9 kg
Camera Section
Image pickup device
: 1/3" Progressive IT CCD
Color separation
prism
: F1.4, 3-color separation prism
Sync system
: Internal sync (built-in SSG)
Lens mount
: 1/3" bayonet system
Optical filter
: OFF, 1/4, 1/16
Gain
: 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB,
ALC
Electronic shutter
: 1/6 to 1/10000, EEI
Variable frame
: 10/30-60/30fps, 10/25-50/25fps, 10/2460/24fps
LCD monitor
: 4.3" LCD, 800 x 480
(WVGA, 410,000 pixels)
Viewfinder
: 0.45" LCOS, 1.22 megapixels
(852 x 480 x 3)
Lens Section (GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)
Allowable
operating
temperature
: 0 f to 40 f (32 J to 104 J)
Allowable
operating
humidity
: 30 % RH
Allowable storage
temperature
: -20 f to 60 f (-4 J to 122 J)
Lens
: Canon F/1.6, 14x, f = 4.4-61.6 mm
(35 mm conversion: 32-448 mm)
Filter diameter
: 82 mm
Storage Section
Supported media
: SDHC (Class 6/10)
Slots
: x2
137
Others
Specifications (continued)
Video/Audio
Recording time
Video recording file
format
Time Code
Time code signal
: Compliant with SMPTE/EBU
LTC input signal
: 1.0 Vp-p to 4.0 Vp-p, high impedance
(unbalanced)
LTC output signal
: 1.0 Vp-p to 4.0 Vp-p, low impedance
(unbalanced)
Analog composite output (480i or 576i : Downconverted, 4:3/16:9)
: 1.0 V (p-p), 75 K, BNC (unbalanced)
Component output (720p/1080i)
: Y: 1.0 V (p-p), 75 K
Pb, Pr: 0.7 V (p-p), 75 K, BNCx3
(unbalanced)
[HD/SD-SDI] output terminal (480i or 576i : Downconverted 720p/
1080i : embedded audio), BNC (unbalanced)
HD-SDI
: Compliant with SMPTE 292 M
SD-SDI
: Compliant with SMPTE 259 M
[AUDIO INPUT 1/2] terminal
: QuickTime File Format (For Final Cut
Pro)
MP4 File Format (HD only)
AVI File Format (SD only)
: Video signal
HD (HQ mode)
: MPEG-2 Long GOP
VBR, 35 Mbps (Max) MPEG-2
MP@HL
HD (SP mode)
: MPEG-2 Long GOP
CBR, 25 Mbps (1440x1080i)/
19 Mbps (1280x720p) MPEG-2
MP@H14
SD
: DV
CBR, 25 Mbps (720x480i)/(720x576i)
Terminal Section
[Y/VIDEO], [PB], and [PR] analog video output terminals
: Approx. 25 minutes (8 GB SDHC card,
35 Mbps, VBR mode)
: Audio signal
: LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
Video format
: NTSC setting
HD (HQ mode)
: 1920x1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 23.98p,
1440x1080/59.94i (MOV only),
1280x720/59.94p, 29.97p, 23.98p
HD (SP mode)
: 1440x1080/59.94i, 1280x720/59.94p,
29.97p, 23.98p
SD
: 720x480/59.94i
(GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U only)
: PAL setting
[MIC]
: -60 dBu, 3 kK, XLR (balanced),
+48 V output (phantom power supply)
HD (HQ mode)
: 1920x1080/50i, 25p, 1440x1080/50i
(MOV only), 1280x720/50p, 25p
[LINE]
: +4 dBu, 10 kK, XLR (balanced)
HD (SP mode)
: 1440x1080/50i, 1280x720/50p, 25p
[AUDIO OUTPUT] terminal
SD
: -8 ±1 dBu (during reference level
input), 1 kK, RCA x2 (unbalanced)
720x576/50i
(GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E only)
[PHONES] terminal
: 3.5 mm mini jack (stereo) x 2
[REMOTE] terminal
: 6-pin JVC remote control unit
connection
[IEEE1394] terminal
: 4-pin
Microphone...................................................................................1
[USB] terminal
: Mini USB-B type, USB 2.0, miniB, slave
function (mass storage class) only
Lens (GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)..........................................1
[GENLOCK INPUT]
terminal
: BB signal
SMPTE 170M(RS-170A) NTSC/ITU-R
BT.470-6 PAL
HDTV 3 level synchronizing signal
SMPTE 296 M/SMPTE 274 M
BNC
[AUX INPUT] terminal
(GY-HM790CHU/GYHM790U only)
: Composite video signal
1.0 V (p-p), 75 K, BNC
[STUDIO] terminal
: 10 pin
138
Accessories
Viewfinder.....................................................................................1
Instructions ...................................................................................1
CD-ROM.......................................................................................1
Warranty Card (GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U only).....................1
Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)
䡵 GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U
95
108.5
59.8 44.6
133
56
(VF MOVE)
90
40
(VF MOVE)
(166)
(S.PAD
MOVE)
30
82.3
(82.3)
225
242.3
231
209
311
210
䡵 GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E
108.5
59.8 44.6
133
56
95
(VF MOVE)
90
40
(VF MOVE)
(166)
(S.PAD
MOVE)
30
225
82.3
(82.3)
242.3
231
209
324
210
* The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement without prior notice.
139
GY-HM790U/GY-HM790CHU/
GY-HM790E/GY-HM790CHE
HD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
2010 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
LST1108-001A
Download PDF

advertising